Post on 02-Dec-2014
SERVICE INFORMATIONIssued by Copying Machine Quality Assurance Center, Canon Inc.
NO. : F-04-E00008DATE : DEC.2000
COLOR LASER COPIER1120/1130/1150
LOCATIONSUBJECT
Revision of Service Handbook
The captioned technical documentation has been revised to reflect the following:
Reasonsto update the descriptions in the previous documentation covering modification offunctions and correction of typographical mistakes.
The present revision is a full revision. Kindly make arrangements so that the olddocument may be replaced with the one being released. Further, please make surethe old document is properly disposed of.
FY8-23B4-02YPrinted in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Major quality issues Quality upgrade/production efficiency
Field quality problems Miscellaneous
MODEL:
COLOR LASER COPIER 1120/1130/1150
REVISION 2
DEC. 2000 FY8-23B4-020COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/11301150 REV.2 DEC. 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. CANON CLC1120/1130/1150 REV.2 DEC. 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
IMPORTANT
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS PUBLISHED BY CANON, INC., JAPAN, AND IS FOR REFERENCE USE ONLY. SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi Ibaraki, 302-8501 Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
i
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. Scheduled Servicing List ........................... 1-11. Copier .................................................. 1-12. Paper Deck .......................................... 1-3
B. Periodically Replaced Parts ....................... 1-4C. Consumables and Durables ...................... 1-5
1. Copier .................................................. 1-52. Paper Deck .......................................... 1-7
D. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure .......... 1-9E. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing ... 1-12
1
2
3
4
5
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Image Adjustment System ......................... 2-1B. Exposure System....................................... 2-8C. Image Formation System........................... 2-9D. Pickup/Feeding System ........................... 2-14
E. Fixing System .......................................... 2-24F. Externals/Controls ................................... 2-27G. Paper Deck .............................................. 2-28H. Electrical System ..................................... 2-32
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OFELECTRICAL PARTS
A. Sensors ...................................................... 3-11. CLC1120/1130..................................... 3-12. CLC1150.............................................. 3-3
B. Thermistors, Lamps, and Heaters ............. 3-5C. Clutches ..................................................... 3-6
1. CLC1120/1130..................................... 3-62. CLC1150.............................................. 3-7
D. Solenoids ................................................... 3-81. CLC1120/1130..................................... 3-82. CLC1150.............................................. 3-9
E. Fans ......................................................... 3-10F. Motors ...................................................... 3-11G. PCBs ........................................................ 3-13H. Paper Deck .............................................. 3-15
1. Sensors and Switches ....................... 3-15
2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids,and PCBs........................................... 3-16
I. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-EmittingDiodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ... 3-171. DC Driver PCB .................................. 3-172. CPU PCB ........................................... 3-183. IP main PCB ..................................... 3-184. Analog Processor PCB ...................... 3-195. Laser Driver PCB............................... 3-196. Lamp Regulator PCB ......................... 3-207. DC Fuse PCB .................................... 3-208. AC Fuse PCB .................................... 3-219. Developing Bias PCB ........................ 3-2110. HVT-AC PCB ..................................... 3-2211. Potential Measurement PCB ............. 3-22
i i
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
1. DC-CPU ................................................... 4-322. R-CPU ..................................................... 4-48D. ADJUST (adjustment mode) .................... 4-51E. FUNCTION (operation check mode) ....... 4-97F. OPTION (settings mode) ....................... 4-119G. PG (test print) ........................................ 4-134H. COUNTER (counter mode).................... 4-136
A. Outline ........................................................ 4-11. Starting Service Mode and
Making Selections ............................... 4-22. Ending Service Mode .......................... 4-33. Backing Up the RAM ........................... 4-34. Basic Operation ................................. 4-12
B. DISPLAY (control display mode) ............. 4-14C. I/O (I/O display mode) .............................. 4-32
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
A. Copier ........................................................ 5-1B. RDF ......................................................... 5-22
A. General Timing Chart ............................... A-1B. Signals and Abbreviations ........................ A-3
1. Signals ................................................ A-32. Abbreviations ...................................... A-8
C. General Circuit Diagram ........................... A-9D. Paper Deck General Circuit Diagram ..... A-13E. Specifications .......................................... A-15
APPENDIX
1. Type .................................................. A-152. System .............................................. A-153. Functions .......................................... A-164. Others ............................................... A-175. Default Ratios ................................... A-176. Copying Speed ................................. A-187. CLC Paper Deck-E1 ......................... A-19
C. Sorter ....................................................... 5-23
1-1
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. Scheduled Servicing List
1. Copier
Caution:Do not use solvents or oils other than those listed.
Externals andcontrols
Originalexposure
Pickup/feeding
Transfer drum
Laser exposure
Charging
Copyboard glassCopyboard coverOzone filterAir filterToner filter
Original reflecting coverNo. 1 through No. 3 mirrors,Lens Scanner rail
Attraction, registrationspring clutchAttraction rollerAttraction roller cleaner panRegistration rollerPre-registration roller 2Pre-registration roller 1Registration path middle guidePickup vertical path roller
Transfer drum cleanerJam sensor (PS6) metal plate(resin tape used for No.2static eliminator mount)Jam sensor (PS5) metal plate(polishing roller motormounting plate)
Dust-proofing glass
Shielding plate, block
Use alcohol.
Or, 1 yr.Or, 1 yr.Or, 1 yr.
Use blower brush.
After cleaning, applysilicone oil.Use lubricant.
Remove unit, and clean.Remove unit, and clean.Remove unit, and clean. every 250,000Remove unit, and clean.Clean every 250,000Clean the guide surface. every 250,000Clean every 250,000
Apply lubricant to thebusihg of the brush.
Clean with lint-free paper;then, clean with alcohol.Be sure the part iscompletely dry beforemounting.Do not use water.For post-cleaning chargingassembly, clean every20,000 copies.
Unit PartIntervals
every25,000
every40,000
every50,000
Remarks
Clean Replace Lubricate Adjust Inspect As of December 2000
every20,000
1
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1-2
Primary charging wire,Post-cleaning charging wire
Separation, Internal/externalstatic eliminator chargingwireGrid plate,primary charging wirecleaning pad
No. 2 cleaner bladeBlack toner concentrationsensorPre-cleaner sensor
Pre-exposure lamp filter
Photosensitive drum buttingblock
Drum heater slip ring
Photosensitive drum buttingrollBias electrode
Fixing inlet guideLower roller separation clawOil applying bladeOil applying feltThermistorFixing oil
Waste tonerHopper toner pan
Leakage breakerImage adjustment
For primary chargingassembly, clean every20,000 copies in low-humidity areas; for high-temperature/humidityareas, clean every 15,000copies.In high-temperature/-humidity areas, replaceevery 15,000 copies.
For high-temperature/-humidity areas, replaceevery 15,000 copies.
Turn over blade.See Note .
Clean with cotton wad;see Note.Clean when replacingphotosensitive drum.Clean when replacingphotosensitive drum.
Dry wipe every 150.000copeis.
Clean when replacingdeveloper.Clean each timedeveloping assembly(each color) is mounted.
Use solvent.
Use lint-free paper.Turn over felt.Dry wipe.
Remove build up oftoner.
Includes execution of autogradation correction.
Photosensitivedrum area
Developingassembly
Fixingassembly
Others
Unit PartIntervals
every25,000
every40,000
every50,000
Remarksevery20,000
(front)
1-3
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Note:If you have cleaned the sensor, be sure to execute the following in service mode:• For the black toner concentration sensor, FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-D.• For pre-cleaning sensor, FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ>CLN-OFST.
Unit PartIntervals
every25,000
every40,000
every250,000
Remarks
2. Paper Deck
Pickupassembly
Feed roller, roll
Clean Replace Lubricate Adjust Inspect As of December 2000
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1-4
B. Periodically Replaced Parts
As of December 2000
No. Part name Part number Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks
1 Ozone filter (FM2, 5, 6) FB2-4397 3 25,000 Or, 1 yr.2 Air filter (FM1) FB4-4819 1 25,000 Or, 1 yr.3 Air filter (FM3) FF5-8405 1 25,000 Or, 1 yr.4 Air filter (FM14, 15) FB2-0247 2 25,000 Or, 1 yr.5 Toner filter (FM5, 6) FB4-4442 2 25,000 Or, 1 yr.6 Ozone filter (FM5) FB4-9641 1 25,000 Or, 1 yr.
1-5
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
C. Consumables and Durables
1. CopierAs of December 2000
1 Cleaner blade (drum cleanerassembly)
2 Drum cleaner scoop-up sheet
3 Side seal, front (drum cleanerassembly)
4 Side seal, rear (drum cleanerassembly)
5 No. 2 scoop-up sheet (pre-cleaning sensor)
6 Grid plate (primary chargingassembly)
7 Primary charging assemblycleaning pad, upper
8 Primary charging assemblycleaning pad, lower
9 Primary charging wire, 100VPrimary charging wire, 120/230V
10 Scanning lamp
11 Manual feeder pickup roller
12 Manual feeder feed roller
13 Manual feeder separationroller
14 Attraction roller scraper15 Waste toner case (6 pc/box)16 Post-cleaning charging wire
Post-cleaning charging wire17 Fixing cleaning belt (upper,
lower)18 Drum cleaner end felt, front19 Drum cleaner end felt, rear20 No. 2 cleaning blade21 Fixing upper roller22 Oil applying felt23 Y starter developer
24 M starter developer
25 C starter developer
No. Part name Part number Q’ty Life Remarks(copies)
FB4-4677
FF5-3993
FF5-8392
FF5-8393
FG6-1046
FB4-5117
FF2-3552
FF2-3551
FY3-0030FY3-0040
FH7-3349
FF5-4327
FF5-4331
FF2-4710
FF5-8427FY9-7006FY3-0030FY3-0040FB4-4543
FF5-2246FF5-2247FB2-0421FB4-4484FF5-9084F42-3132F42-3133F42-3122F42-3123F42-3112F42-3113
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
2
1
1
11111
11211111111
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,00020,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,00025,00020,00020,00025,000
40,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,00040,000
Simultaneously withphotosensitive drum.Simultaneously withcleaning blade.Simultaneously withcleaning blade.Simultaneously withcleaning blade.Simltaneously with cleaningblade.For high temperature/highhumidity, 15,000.For high temperature/highhumidity, 15,000.
For high temperature/highhumidity, 15,000.
Manual feeder counterreading.Manual feeder counterreading.Manual feeder counterreading.
By user.100V120/230V
Simultaneously withcleaning blade.20,000 per edge.Or, 1 yr.20,000 per side.
120V UL only.
120V UL only.
120V UL only.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1-6
26 Bk starter developer
27 Separation/internal andexternal static charging wiresSeparation/internal andexternal charging wires
28 Attraction brush unit29 Transfer blade unit30 Transfer drum cleaner31 Polishing roller32 Transfer drum sheet33 Separation push-up roll
34 Transfer side scraper35 Fixing lower roller36 Re-pickup feed roller, front
(re-pickup assembly)37 Re-pickup feed roller, rear (re-
pickup assembly)38 Feed roller (re-pickup
assembly)39 Separation roller (re-pickup
assembly)40 Feed roller, front (duplexing
unit)41 Feed roller, rear (duplexing
unit)42 Oil applying blade43 Fixing heater, upper
44 Fixing heater, lower
45 Pre-exposure lamp46 Primary charging assembly47 Separation charging assembly48 Internal static eliminator49 Eternal static eliminator50 Post-cleaning charging
assembly51 Insulating bush (fixing
assembly)52 Pickup roller, front (cassette)53 Pickup roller, rear (cassette)54 Separation roller (cassette)55 Feed roller (cassette)56 Y developing assembly57 M developing assembly58 C developing assembly59 Bk developing assembly
No. Part name Part number Q’ty Life Remarks(copies)
F42-3102F42-3103FY3-0030
FY3-0040
FG6-0798FG6-0797FB4-4953FB4-5111FB4-4195FB2-0631
FF5-2070FB4-4486FF5-2101
FF5-2102
FF5-2103
FF5-2104
FF5-8366
FF5-8367
FB4-4536FH7-4617FH7-4618FH7-4619FH7-4611FH7-4612FH7-4613FG5-3181FG6-0892FG6-0795FG6-0796FG6-0801FG6-0888
FB4-7807
FF5-7829FF5-7830FB2-7777FF5-7837FG6-0781FG6-0782FG6-0783FG6-0784
111
1
112111
211
1
1
1
1
1
1111111111111
4
11111111
40,00040,00050,000
50,000
50,00050,00050,00050,00050,00050,000
50,00050,000100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000100,000100,000100,000100,000100,000100,000150,000150,000150,000150,000150,000150,000
150,000
250,000250,000250,000250,000500,000500,000500,000500,000
120V UL only.100V
120/230V
As a unit.As a unit.
Simultaneously with transfersheet.
Or, 1 yr.Duplexing counterreading.Duplexing counterreading.Duplexing counterreading.Duplexing counterreading.Duplexing counterreading.Duplexing counterreading.
100V120V230V100V120V230V
Per cassette holder.Per cassette holder.Per cassette holder.Per cassette holder.
1-7
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
2. Paper Deck
No. Part name Part number Q’ty Life Remarks(copies)
As of December 2000
1 Paper deck pickup roller2 Paper deck feeding roller3 Paper deck separation roller
FB4-2033FB4-2034FB2-7777
221
250,000250,000250,000
Actual number of copies.Actual number of copies.Actual number of copies.
1-9
1. Check the transfer charging system.2. Clean the dust-proofing glass.3. Clean and check the developing assembly butting roll.
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
Conditions· copy density at '5'· text/photo mode
Select OPTION>BODY>PASCAL=0 in service mode.
Check the height of each charging wire.
Clean the charging wires.*
*If the primary charging wire is soiled, replace it.
Make sample copies using TEST in service mode for the following:
0. normal image using Test Sheet1. PGTEST=4 using M mono color2. PGTEST=4 using C mono color3. PGTEST=4 using Y mono color4. PGTEST=4 using Bk mono color5. PGTEST=106. PGTEST=5 DENS 487. PGTEST=14 photo mode (TXPH:1)
Adjusting the Left/Right Density Slope Correcting Difference in Density
Make a copy of the Test Sheet.
Is the density different between front
and rear?
Is the density different
between front and rear on the sample copy made
at PGTYPE=10 or 5?
Is the difference in density different from
one color to another?
Is the difference in density gone?
Is the density higher (darker) at the rear?
Check the coating of toner on the developing cylinder. Check the developing assembly butting roll and the photosensitive drum butting block. Clean them if soiled with toner.
Turn the adjusting screw at the front of the primary charging assembly counterclockwise.
Execute test printing at PGTYPE=10 or 5.
Turn the adjusting screw at the front of the primary charging assembly clockwise.
Is the difference in density gone?
Check to find out if the copyboard glass is riding over something.
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirror, standard white plate, and copyboard glass.
Execute ADJUST>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.
Is the difference in density gone?
Check the original scanning lamp.
Is the darkest area of the test print
made for a 16-gradation check too light?
Does the density become lower (lighter) gradually in continuous
copying mode?
Is the density low (light) in all colors?
Execute FUNCTION>DPC>DPC in service mode.
Is the value of DISPLAY>DPOT>V00-500,
V00-700 normal?
Open the hopper, and insert the door switch actuator. Check the temperature and humidity using DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP, HUM in service mode.
Are the temperature and humidity
readings normal?
Check the environment sensor.
To [A] of next page.
Check the high-voltage output of the internal/external static eliminator.
Is the value of ADJUST>DENS identical
with the value on the label?
To [B] of next page.
Enter the data once again, and make 50 copies.
Check the laser shutter and the laser system.
Reference (normal values) V00-500: 430 to 570 V00-700: 600 to 800
1. Check the insulating sheet of the transfer blade for scratches and peeling.2. Check the shaft of the transfer drum for play.3. Check the cable inside the transfer drum.
D. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
1-10
NO
YESNO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
*Do not clean the grid plate.
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
[B]
[A]
Check the locked condition of the developing assembly.
Check the value of DISPLAY>DENS>DENS-Y, DENS-M, DENS-C, DENS-K in service mode.
Is the density of black normal?
Is the value of DENS-K -20 or lower?
Compare the density of a test print made of Bk halftone against one made at time of installation or replacement of the developer.
Is it more or less the same?
Is the surface of the black toner concentration
sensor soiled?
Is the test print of Bk mono halftone uneven?
Replace the Bk developer.
Check the supply of toner from the hopper.
Go through the check items for the developing assembly.
Clean the surface of the sensor.
Replace the photosensitive drum and developer (all colors).
Is the value of DENS-Y, DENS-M,
DENS-C the specified value ± 20?
Is it -20 or lower?
Remove the toner concentration sensor from inside the developing assembly.
Is the surface of the sensor soiled?
Replace the developer.
Go through the check items for the developing assembly.
Check the supply of toner from the hopper.
Replace the sensor.
Check Items for the Developing Assembly1. Is the mechanism used to lock the developing assembly to
the photosensitive drum normal?2. Is the position of the developing assembly normal?3. Are the developing assembly butting roll and butting block
free of dirt?4. Are the developing bias AC and DC outputs normal?5. Is the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner?
Further, is the coating thick enough?6. Is the position of the electrode of the developing cylinder
normal?If a fault is found after making the above checks, perform cleaning or adjustment as necessary.If fogging or light density still occurs after making all above checks (1 through 6), replace the developing assembly.
Correcting Fogging
Is fogging noted?
Is fogging noted for all colors?
Is the primary charging assembly soiled?
Execute FUNCTION>DPC>DPC in service mode.
Is the value of DISPLAY>DPOT>V00-500,
V00-700 normal>?
Check the developing assembly.
Is there a fault?
Replace the photosensitive drum and developers (all colors).
To [D] of next page.
To [B].
Clean.*
Check the laser shutter, and adjust the laser power.
Reference (normal value): V00-500: 430 to 570 V00-700: 600 to 800
Correct the fault.
1-11
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
Adjusting Transfer
[D][C]
Check the locked condition of the transfer blade in service mode.
Is a transfer fault noted?
Are there white spots (transfer fault)?
Is the fault limited to a specific color?
Are there white spots in vertical direction?
Are there vertical lines corresponding to
separation claws?
Make several test prints. Does the
copy density decrease (become light)?
Check the transfer blade.
Check the transfer blade.
Check the output of the separation charging assembly.
Check the internal/external static eliminator.
Adjusting the Original Exposure System/Color Balance
Check the positions of the copyboard glass, standard white plate, original scanning lamp, reflecting plate, and mirrors, and clean them.
Check to see if the No. 1 mirror/No. 2 mirror base is not riding over the rail.
Check to find out if the value of ADJUST>COLOR in service mode is identical with the value recorded on the label.
Check the contact between the CCD and the CCD driver PCB.
Set OPTION>BODY>PASCAL in service mode to ’1’.
Execute ADJUST>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.
Is the image better? End.
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.
Make a copy of the CA1 Test Sheet.
Is the gray scale (especially light area)
of the copy good?
End.
Make adjustments in ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-Y, ADJ-M, ADJ-C, ADJ-K in service mode.To make copies darker, increase the setting.To make copies lighter, decrease the setting.
1-12
E. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing
Optical System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Process System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Developing System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Pickup/Feeding System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Attraction roller, attraction roller cleaner pan
Lint-free paper Cleaning (Remove the unit.)
Registration roller, pre-registration roller 1/2
Alcohol, lint-free paper Cleaning
Pickup vertical path roller Alcohol, lint-free paper Cleaning
Registration path middle guide
Alcohol, lint-free paper Clean the guide surface
Developing roll Solvent Cleaning at time of replacing the developer.
Developing assembly butting roll, butting block (photosensitive drum)
Solvent Cleaning at time of replacing the drum.
Charging wire, shielding plate, block
Lint-free paper, alcohol Dry wiping; then, cleaning with alcoholDo NOT use water. (Note 2)
Pre-cleaning sensor assembly, No. 2 scoop-up sheet assembly
Cotton wad, lint-free paperBlower brush
Use cotton wad to clean the sensor assembly. (Note 3)
Black toner concentration sensor assembly, No. 2 blade assembly
Lint-free paper, blower brush
Remove the buildup of toner; then, dry wipe.Do NOT use solvent. (Note 4)
Pre-exposure lamp, filter, dust-proofing glass, potential sensor
Lint-free paper, blower brush
Cleaning
Fixing System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Transfer Drum System
Part Tool and others Work and remarks
Charging wire, shielding plate, block
Lint-free paper, alcohol Dry wiping; then, cleaning with alcohol.Do NOT use water. (Note 2)
Transfer drum cleaner assembly
Blower brush Cleaning
Jam sensor (PS6) metal plate resin tape section
Blower brushLint-free paper
Dry wiping
Jam sensor (PS5) metalplate
Blower brushLint-free paper
Dry wiping
Thermistor
Separation claw
Inlet guide
Solvent Cleaning
Oil applying felt, oil applying blade
Paper rag Cleaning
Lens, CCD Blower brush Cleaning (Note 1)
Scanner rail Silicone oil Cleaning; then, lubricating
Reflecting plate, No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors Blower brush Cleaning
Copyboard sheet, copyboard glass
Standard white plate
Alcohol, lint-free paper Cleaning
Note 1: Take care not to touch the mirror and lens. Take care so that the CCD will not be soiled with dust.Note 2: Replace the primary charging wire; insert other charging wires after making sure that they are completely dry; further, be sure NOT to clean the grid plate.Note 3: After mounting, execute FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ>CLN-OFST. Thereafter, record the values of ADJUST>SENS-ADJ>CLN-TH, CLN-TMP on the service label.Note 4: After mounting, execute FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-D.
2-1
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Image Adjustment System
1 Image Margin
The image margin of a copy is normal if itis as follows when made in Direct withoriginal detection OFF.Leading edge: 8/0 ± 1.5 mm (8.0 ± 2.0 mm)Left/right: 2.0 ± 1.5mm (2.0 ± 1.5 mm)Trailing edge: 2.5 ± 1.5 mm (4.5 ± 2.0 mm)
The value in parentheses representsdouble-sided copying. Figure 2-1 Leading Edge Image Margin
Figure 2-2 Left/Right Image Margin2 Checking/Adjusting the Image
Margin
When making checks and adjustments,observe the following order:a. Adjusting the left/right registrationb. Adjusting the attraction position (ATT-T)c. Adjusting the image margin (RG-XA,
RG-XB)d. Adjusting the transfer delay (TR-
DELAY)e. Adjusting the image read start position
(ADJ-XY)f. Adjust the image trailing edge margin
(TR-END-A, TR-END-B)
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-2
a. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration1) Make ten copies each from all cassettes,
multifeeder, and duplexing unit, andcheck the left/right registration A; it iscorrect if as follows:for cassette: 2.0 ± 1.5 mmfor multifeeder: 2.0 ± 1.5 mmfor duplexing unit: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm
2) If the registration A is not as indicated,perform the following:
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
A
[2]
[1]
§ For the Cassette1) Remove the cassette front cover from the
cassette holder you want to adjust.2) Loosen the left/right screw [1].3) Turn the adjusting screw [2] to adjust the
position of the horizontal registrationadjusting plate so that the horizontalregistration on an image is 2.0 ± 1.5 mm.(A full turn causes a shift of about 0.7mm.)· To increase the registration along the
front, turn the adjusting screwcounterclockwise.
· To increase the registration along therear, turn the adjusting screwclockwise.
4) After the adjustment, be sure to perform"registering the paper width basic value."
2-3
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
§ For the MultifeederTurn the screw [1] to move the position ofthe tray so that the registration is 2.0 ± 1.5mm in Direct.
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
§ For the Duplexing UnitLoosen the screw [1], and move theposition of the paper jogging guide so thatthe registration is 2.0 ± 1.5 mm in Direct.
b. Adjusting the Attraction Position(ATTRACT)
1) Select A4.2) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ATT-
CHK .3) Set ATT-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention;
sides B and A), and press OK.4) Select ATT-ON, and press OK.
• Copy paper will be picked up,attracted, and stopped.
[1]
[1]
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-4
5) Slide out the transfer frame.6) Place a ruler and copy paper against the
marking (Figure 2-7) etched to thetransfer drum ring (front, rear), andmeasure the position d of the copy paperin relation to the leading edge of the copypaper. Perform this for both sides A andB.
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
7) Make adjustments so that d is 0 ± 0.5 mmin service mode (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ).for side A:ATT-T-Afor side B:ATT-T-B• Changing ATT-T-A, ATT-T-B to '1'
will shift the point of attraction byabout 0.4 mm.
• A higher setting will delay the start ofattraction (in the direction of the blackarrow) while a lower setting advancesit (in the direction of the white arrow).
8) After adjustment, turn off and then on thepower switch.• Keep in mind that copies made in
normal mode will be black if youforget to turn off and then on thepower switch.
(front) (rear)
2-5
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
c. Adjusting the Image Leading EdgeMargin (RG-XA, RG-XB)
1) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RGST-CHK in service mode.
2) Set RGST-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention;sides B and A), and press OK.
3) Select RGST-ON, and press OK.• A total of two prints (one each shown
in the figure) will be generated.
Figure 2-9
Test print on side A
Test print on side B
Figure 2-10
4) Measure the leading edge margin d on theprint. Perform this for both sides A and B.
5) Select the following service modes; then,make adjustments by changing thesettings so that the leading edge d is 8 ±0.5 mm.for side A: ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RG-
XAfor side B: ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RG-
XB• Setting it to '1' will shift the leading
edge margin by about 0.06 mm.• A higher setting increases the leading
edge margin while a lower settingdecreases it.
d
(8.0 ± 0.5 mm)
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-6
d. Adjusting the Transfer Delay (TR-DELAY)
1) Select FUNCTION>ATTRACT>TR1-CHK in service mode.
2) Set TR1-CHK to '1' (2-sheet retention;both sides B and A), and press OK.
3) Select TR1-ON, and press OK.• A total of two prints (one each shown
in the figure) will be generated.
Figure 2-11
Test print on side A
Test print on side B
Figure 2-12
4) Measure the transfer delay d on side B onthe generated print.
5) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>TR-DLY-A or B in service mode, and makeadjustments so that the transfer delay is 3± 0.5 mm.• Changing the setting to '1' will shift
the transfer delay by about 0.4 mm.• A higher setting will increase the
transfer delay while a lower settingwill decrease it.
6) Select FUNCTION>ATTRACT>TR2-CHK in service mode, and set '1' (2-sheetretention; both sides B and A), and pressOK.
7) Select TR2-ON, and press OK.8) Check the leading edge margin (8 ± 0.5
mm) on the print.
2-7
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
e. Adjusting the Image Read StartPosition (ADJ-XY)
1) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboardglass.
2) Select ADJUST>ADJ-XY in servicemode.
3) on the ADJ-XY screen, press the CopyStart key.• The appropriate copying mode will
automatically be selected, and a copyis made with a shift of about 50 mm asshown in the figure.
Figure 2-134) If part of the image is missing, decrease
the setting of ADJ-X , ADJ-Y in servicemode.
5) If part of the image is outside the imagearea, increase the setting of ADJ-X , ADJ-Y.
6) Press the Copy Start key once again, andmake a check.
7) Press the Reset key.
f. Adjusting the Image Trailing EdgeMargin (TR-END-A, B; end of transferhigh voltage)If you have replaced the transfer drum
unit in the field, correct the variation in the endof the transfer voltage.1) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>TR-END-
A or B in service mode, and enter '25' (10mm).
2) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>TR2-ON;then, press the OK key.
3) Measure the distance X (mm) between thepoint at which blurring starts along thetrailing edge of the image on thegenerated test print and the trailing edgeof the image.
4) Enter the result of (10 - x)/0.4 as theadjustment value of TR-END-A or -B.(Round the result up to a whole number.)
5) Select ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>TR2-ON inservice mode once again; then, press theOK key.
6) Check to make sure that the image alongthe trailing edge of the generated test printis not blurred.
7) Record the value of ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>TR-END-A or -B on the servicelabel.
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
50
50
Figure 2-13a
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-8
B. Exposure System
1 Routing the Scanner DriveCable
Route the scanner drive cable asindicated; i.e., [1] through [8]. Then, perform"adjusting the mirror position."
Figure 2-14
2 Adjusting the Mirror Position
Be sure to adjust the position of the mirrorwhen you have routed the scanner drive cable.1) Extend the arm of the mirror positioning
tool (FY9-3040) fully.2) Fit the mirror positioning tool between
No. 1 mirror base and No. 2 mirror base.3) Route the scanner drive cable to the No. 1
mirror mount. Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
1
2
3
468
5, 8
8
2-9
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C. Image Formation System
1 Adjusting the Height ofCharging Wires
The height (position) of the charging wireof each charging assembly may be adjusted byturning the screw found behind the assembly.A full turn of the screw will shift the chargingwire by about 0.7 mm.
You cannot, however, change the heightof the wire of the internal static eliminator,external charge eliminator, separationcharging assembly or the post-cleaningcharging assembly.
Figure 2-17
2 Points to Note about thePhotosensitive Drum
a. The photosensitive drum is vulnerable tostrong light, and exposure to strong lightfor an appreciable period of time will leadto white spots or black bands on copies.Whenever you have removed thephotosensitive drum from the copier, besure to wrap the light-blocking sheet (orfive to six sheets of fresh copy paper)around it, and keep it in a dark place.
b. If you are installing a new photosensitivedrum, be sure to perform the following:1) Install the new photosensitive drum.
At this time, be sure to mount it sothat the lot No. label attached inside itis toward the front of the copier.
2) Mount the primary chargingassembly, pre-cleaning chargingassembly, photosensitive drumcleaner assembly, and developingassemblies.
3) Coat the No. 2 blade of the blacktoner concentration sensor evenlywith drum cleaner lubricant (TKN-0480).
4) Coat the blade of the photosensitivedrum cleaner assembly with drumcleaner lubricant (TKN-0480).
5) Dry wipe the window of the blacktoner concentration sensor, andmount it.
10.5
17.0
17.0
Primary charging assembly
Separation charging assembly
External charging assembly
4 mm (approx.)
Charging assembly
Height of charging wire (mm) Range
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-10
6) Dry wipe the window of the pre-cleaning sensor, and mount it.
7) Turn on the power switch, and keepthe copier in standby state.
8) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL>STIR-4 in service mode, and executeit.
9) Select FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ>CLN-OFST, and execute it.
10) Record the settings of ADJUST>SENS-ADJ>CLN-TH , CLN-TMPon the service label attached behindthe front right cover.
11) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-D in service mode, and executeit.
c. If the surface of the photosensitive drumis soiled, wipe it with a flannel clothcoated with toner. (Do NOT use paper,lint-free or otherwise.)Do not use solvent when cleaning it. Donot touch its surface.
3Adjusting the Position of thePhotosensitive Drum FixingShaft
Slide the photosensitive drum frame unitabout 5 cm out of the copier, and then slide itback in. If the movement is not smooth, adjustthe position of the photosensitive drum fixingshaft using the drum shaft positioning tool(FY9-3045).
This adjustment, however, need not bemade if the images are free of colordisplacement, blurring, and faults at intervalsand, moreover, the discrepancy between thephotosensitive drum fixing shaft and the holeof the photosensitive drum flange is about 1mm.1) Slide out the photosensitive drum unit
from the copier.2) Remove the six screws [1], and detach the
photosensitive drum butting blocks [2](front, back); then, detach thephotosensitive drum [3] from thephotosensitive drum frame unit [4].
3) Slide the photosensitive drum frame unitinto the copier, and secure it in place withthree screws.
4) Secure the drum motor assembly [5] to thecopier temporarily with seven screws [6].
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
[6] [6][6]
[6]
[5]
[6]
2-11
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
5) Secure the drum shaft positioning tool [7]in place to the photosensitive drum frameunit with the two screws [8] removed instep 2).
6) Secure the drum motor assembly in placewith seven screws.
7) Detach the drum shaft positioning tool,and slide out the photosensitive drum unitfrom the copier; then, mount the unit andparts removed in step 1).
4 Use of Grease
Do NOT use grease (conducting orotherwise) to the slip ring for the drum heater.
Developer
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Black
S-B gap
0.62 mm
0.74 mm
0.74 mm
0.48 mm
Table 2-1
[7][8]
Figure 2-20
5 Adjusting the DevelopingAssembly S-B Gap
If you have replaced the developing blade,adjust the S-B gap of each sleeve using the S-B gap gauge (FY9-3044).
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-12
6 Replacing the Developer
1) Open the hopper unit fully.2) An appreciable amount of developer will
fall out in the next step. Keep a plastic bag[1] as shown.
3) Detach the cap [2] from the dischargeopening found at the front bottom of thedeveloping assembly whose developeryou want to replace.
4) Select FUNCTION>INSTALL in servicemode.
5) While keeping the plastic bag against thedischarge opening, press RECV-M/C/Y/K , as appropriate, in service mode.• When the developer has stopped
pouring, press the Stop key to stop theoperation.
6) Fit the cap back on the discharge opening.7) Remove the screw, and detach the
developing assembly; then, detach the capfrom the discharge opening.In the case of the black developingassembly, disconnect the connector also.
8) While tilting the developing assembly,turn the gear by hand to discharge allremaining developer.At this time, tilt the developing assemblyfarther down while turning the gear so thatno toner will remain when it is finally heldupright.
9) Fit the cap to the discharge opening.10) Mount the developing assembly to the
copier.11) At the end of the wait period, select
FUNCTION>INSTALL in service mode.12) Press SPLY-M/C/Y/K, as appropriate.13) See that the developing assembly is
locked in place, and the screw inside itrotates (about 10 sec).
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
[1]
[2]
2-13
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
14) Fit the developer supply funnel thatcomes with the copier to the developingassembly upright.
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-247 Points to Note about the Pre-
Cleaning Sensor
If you have removed or replaced the pre-cleaning sensor assembly, perform thefollowing:1) Dry wipe the window of the pre-cleaning
sensor, and mount it.2) Turn on the power switch, and keep the
copier in standby state.3) Select and execute FUNCTION>SENS-
ADJ>CLN-OFST in service mode.4) Record the settings of ADJUST>SENS-
ADJ>CLN-TH , CLN-TMP in servicemode to the service label behind the frontright door.
8 Points to Note about the BlackToner Concentration Sensor
If you have dry wiped the window of theblack toner concentration sensor, select andexecute FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-Dafter mounting it.
15) Put the developer into the developingassembly.• Turn the developer container slowly
while tilting it to facilitate the work.16) When done, press the Stop key to stop the
operation.17) Execute STIR-Y/M/C/K in service mode
(about 10 min).18) Execute INIT-Y/M/C/K in service mode
(about 10 min).19) Select ADJUST>DENS in service mode.20) Record the data of the DENS screen on
the service label.
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-14
D. Pickup/Feeding System
1 Orientation of the CassettePickup Roller
When mounting the pickup roller [1] tothe pickup assembly, be sure that the roundmarking [2] on the rubber portion is at thecopier's front. The pickup roller is identifiedby color as follows:• for the front, use the gold-colored roller.• for the rear, use the silver-colored roller.
Figure 2-25
2 Orientation of the CassetteFeed Roller
When mounting the feed roller [1] to thepickup assembly, be sure that the gear [2] ofthe feed roller is at the copier's front.
Figure 2-26
3 Orientation of the CassetteSeparation Roller
When mounting the separation roller [1]to the pickup assembly, be sure that the roundmarking [2] is at the copier's front.
Figure 2-27
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
2-15
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4 Adjusting the Pressure of theSeparation Roller
If double feeding or pickup failure occursduring pickup, adjust the position of thepressure spring of the separation roller.a. If double feeding occurs, move the spring
in the direction of arrow A.b. If pickup failure occurs, move the spring
in the direction of arrow B.
Figure 2-28
5Orientation of the DuplexingFeed Roller and the DuplexingSeparation Roller
When mounting the feed roller [1], be surethat the round marking [2] is at the copier'sfront.
When mounting the separation roller [3],be sure that the round marking [4] is at thecopier's rear.
Figure 2-30
6Orientation of the ManualPickup, Feed, and SeparationRollers
When mounting each roller, be sure thatthe round marking [1], [2], [3] is at the copier'srear.
Figure 2-29
[A]
[B]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1] [2] [3]
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-16
7 Attaching the Timing Belt forthe Multifeeder Assembly
Keep the rack plate [1] of the multifeederin closed state.
Move the slide volume [2] in the directionof the arrow, and attach the timing belt [3] tothe pulley.
Figure 2-31
8Adjusting the Position of theDuplexing Unit Paper JoggingGuide Sensor
1) Select A4R or LTRR, and performcopying on the first side of a double-sidedcopy.
2) Slide out the duplexing unit.3) Measure the distance L of the paper
jogging guide plate [1].A4R: L = 210 ± 0.3 mmLTRR: L = 216 ± 0.3 mm
4) If the distance is not as indicted, adjust theposition of the paper jogging guidesensor. Figure 2-32
9 Position of the Duplexing UnitStopper Plate Solenoid
1) Keep the steel core [1] of the solenoiddrawn to the copier.
2) Rotate the shutter [2], and keep thedistance as indicated, i.e., L1 is 1.0 ± 0.2mm. Then, secure the stopper platesolenoid.
Figure 2-33
[1][2] [3]
[1] [1]
[L]
[1]
[2]
[L1]
2-17
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
10 Position of the Duplexing FeedRoller Solenoid
While the steel core of the solenoid isdrawn to the copier, mount the duplexing feedsolenoid so that the distance L2 between thetop edge of the feed roller and the holding trayis 49 ± 0.5 mm.
Figure 2-34
11 Replacing the Transfer DrumSheet
Caution:The transfer drum frame is equippedwith a slip-stop mechanism; as such,keep the following in mind:• Do not turn the transfer drum
clockwise with your fingers insidethe opening in the transfer drumwhile the transfer drum is on thetransfer drum frame.
• When the transfer drum is off theframe, it will tend to rotate inclockwise direction. (If the transferdrum is rotated clockwise, thetransfer brush and the attractionbrush will become damaged.
a. Removing the Transfer Drum Sheet1) Open the front cover; then, slide out the
hopper, and open it 180°.2) Slide out the transfer drum frame.3) Detach the transfer drum from the transfer
drum frame.4) Remove the four TP screws [1], and
remove the transfer drum side scraper [2].
Figure 2-35
[L2]
[2] [2]
[1][1]
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-18
5) Peel off the trailing edge of the transferdrum sheet and keep it off the transferdrum.
Figure 2-38
Figure 2-37
Figure 2-36
6) Peel off the leading edge of the transferdrum sheet.
7) Peel off the transfer drum sheet whileholding it on its leading edge.
Caution:Remove all traces of adhesive from thetransfer drum ring.
2-19
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
Figure 2-40
Figure 2-39
b. Attaching the Transfer Drum Sheet
Caution:Do not touch the area on the transferdrum sheet where copy paper will beattracted.
1) Shift the locking lever of the transferblade and the attraction brush inclockwise direction to release them.
2) Clean the area where double-sided tape isattached on the transfer drum ring withalcohol.
3) Turn the ring so that the ring linking plate[1] is positioned as shown.
4) Remove the double-sided tape from theleading edge (where holes are found) ofthe transfer drum sheet.
5) By referring to the long hole in the leftside of the linking plate and the long holeon the left side of the sheet, attach thetransfer drum sheet so that it is horizontalwhile observing the following:
Figure 2-41
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-20
Caution:1. Fix the side of the transfer drum sheet
with a long hole temporarily in placeso that that the gap between the leftside of the transfer drum sheet andthe edge of the transfer ring is about0.5 mm.
2. Then, lightly pull the transfer drumsheet to the right so that the middle ofthe sheet will not become slack, andattach the right side of the sheetwhere a round hole is found.
3. At this time, check to make sure thatthe right edge of the transfer drumsheet will not overlap the edge of thetransfer ring; otherwise, shift the leftside of the sheet where a long hole isfound, and start over with step 2.
6) Let the transfer drum sheet drop on itsown weight, and remove the backingpaper from both sides of the sheet.
7) without holding the transfer drum sheet,turn the front side of the transfer ring towrap it around the transfer drum.
Figure 2-42
Transfer ringsNo overlapping.
Pull lightly to remove the slack in the middle.
Figure 2-43
Figure 2-44
2-21
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:After wrapping the transfer drum sheetaround the transfer drum, check the gapbetween the leading edge and the trailingedge of the sheet; make sure it is 0±1.5mm. If not, go back to step 5), and makesure that the sheet is horizontal, and startover.
8) After making sure that there is no gap,start attaching both ends of the sheet to thetransfer drum.At this time, try using both thumbs asshown, moving them as if to rub the sheetin axial direction. (Do not move thethumbs in peripheral direction, which cancause parts of the sheet to lift.)
9) Remove the backing paper from thetrailing edge of the transfer drum sheet.
Figure 2-44a
Figure 2-44b
Leading edge of sheet
Trailing edge of sheet
0±1.5 mm or less
Figure 2-45
Figure 2-46
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-22
10) Without pulling the transfer drum sheet,lightly press along the middle of thedouble-sided tape, along the trailing edgeof the sheet in sequence: [1], [2], and [3].
11) Move the thumbs in axial direction,lightly pressing against the linking plateso that the double-sided tape will befirmly in contact.
12) Shift back the lever released in step 1).13) Check the transfer drum sheet for
scratches, dents, and slack.
Caution:Be sure there is no distortion or slack inthe middle of the transfer drum. Ifdistortion exists, the transfer drum willlikely come into contact with thephotosensitive drum, causing toner tofuse to the photosensitive drum andultimately leading to cleaning faults ofthe photosensitive drum; if slack exists,on the other hand, such image faults astransfer faults and color displacementcan occur.
14) Mount the transfer drum side scraperremoved when detaching the old transferdrum sheet, and then mount the transferdrum to the machine.
Figure2-46a
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 2-46c
Figure 2-46d
Figure 2-46e
Figure 2-46b
Leading edgeof sheetTrailing edgeof sheet
Direction of rotation
Correctly Attached Sheet
Incorrectly Attached Sheet
Incorrectly Attached Sheet
2-23
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
12 When Replacing the TransferDrum Assembly
If you have replaced the transfer drum,perform the following in service mode(ADJUST>FEED-ADJ; p. 2-1):1. Adjusting the attraction position (ATT-T-
A, ATT-T-B)2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin
(RG-XA, RG-XB, RG-Y)3. Transfer delay (TR-DLY-A, TR-DLY-B)4. Adjusting the image trailing edge margin
(TR-END-A, TR-END-B)
Figure 2-47
13Position of the PaperDeflecting Plate Solenoid(SL10; delivery assembly)
Loosen the adjusting screw [4] to makeadjustments while the paper deflecting plate[2] is butting against the delivery upper guide[3] when the solenoid [1] is on (viewing thedelivery assembly from the side at the rear).
[1] [4]
[2] [3]
14 Applying Lubricant to theTransfer drum Cleaner
1) Use a specific lubricant (e.g., FY9-6006).2) Put a drop of lubricant (one drop each) at
points indicated (A).3) Turn the gear several times by hand so
that the lubricant spreads inside thebushing.
4) Put another drop (one each) once again,and repeat step 3.
5) When all amounts of lubricant havespread to the inside of the bushing, wipethe excess lubricant with lint-free paper(indicated by dashed lines).
Figure 2-47a
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-24
E. Fixing System
1 When Replacing the FixingHeater
Do not touch the surface of the heater.
Reference:The copier's fixing heater has a specificorientation (front, rear); be sure to mountit so that the black lead line is at the rear.
2 Adjusting the Nip (nut forlocking the fixing assembly)
a. Measuring the Nip WidthIf you are taking measurements while the
roller is not hot, let the copier complete itsstandby period, wait 15 min, and make 20copies.
b. Taking Measurements1) Start service mode.2) Select FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-
CHK , and press OK.The nip width is correct if as indicated;otherwise, use the adjusting nut [1] tomake adjustments.
Caution:b and c are points 10 to 15 mm frompaper ends.
Figure 2-48
* Be sure both upper and lower rollers aresufficiently heated.
Measurements*
7.3 ±0.3 mm
0.5 mm or less
0.5 mm or less
Dimension
a
|b-c|
b-ac-a
2-25
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3 Orientation of the Cleaning Belt
Mount the fixing cleaning belt as shown .
Figure 2-49 Fixing Upper CleaningBelt (rear view)
Figure 2-50 Fixing Lower CleaningBelt (rear view)
4 Orientation of the fixing Upper/Lower Solenoid
Adjust the position so that the stroke [A]is 3 ± 0.2 mm for the fixing paper solenoid and4 ± 0.2 mm for the lower fixing solenoid.
Figure 2-51
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-26
5 Points to Note When Replacingthe Oil Coating Assembly
Caution:1. The oil coating unit is adjusted and
assembled at the factory, and mustnot be removed. Do not touch thescrews [1] shown in the figure.
2. If you have replaced the oil felt, besure to execute COPIER>OPTION>FIXING>PUMP-ON in servicemode to impregnate it with fixing oil.Be sure to press the Stop key in about10 min.
Figure 2-52 (rear)
Figure 2-53 (front)
[1]
[1]
[1]
2-27
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
F. Externals/Controls
1 Handling the Flywheel
The copier's flywheel [1] weighs 8 kg intotal. Take extra care not to drop it duringwork. When holding it, be sure to support it onits left and right as shown.
Figure 2-54
[1]
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-28
G. Paper Deck
1 Mounting the Paper LevelIndicator
If you have moved the paper levelindicator drive belt behind the front cover orthe deck lifter when removing the front cover,perform the following to correct its position:1) Move down the deck lifter to the lower
limit.2) Move the drive belt [1] behind the front
cover by hand lightly in the direction ofthe arrow until it stops (so that the whitearea in the window [2] increases).
3) Mount the front cover [3]. If you operate the deck without matchingthe paper level indicator and the decklifter, you can damage the drive system ofthe paper level indicator. Exercise care.
Figure 2-55
Figure 2-56
2 Adjusting the Left/RightRegistration of the Deck
If the left/right registration is 0 ± 2.0 mm,adjust the position of the latch plate [1] withtwo screws [2]. (At this time, use thegraduation [3] on the latch plate as a guide.)
Figure 2-57
[1] [3] [2]
(rear left of compartment)
2-29
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3 Adjusting the Position of theRoll
Make adjustments using the fourmounting screws [4] of the roll support plate[3] so that the roll [1] is about 3 mm from thefloor [2] when the compartment is fully slidout.
(At this time, use the graduation [5] on thefront side plate as a reference.)
Figure 2-58
4 Routing the Lifter Cable
1) Fix the lifter drive shaft and the lifter inplace with a hex wrench [1] and a longscrewdriver [2]
2) Fix the cable fixing plate [3] in place tothe lifter with two screws.
3) Hook the lifter cable on the pulley [4].4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the
pulley [5] of the lifter drive shaft, andwind the cable along the groove about 1.5turns. At this time, be sure that the liftercable is taut until the long screwdriverused to keep it in position is lightly lifted.
5) In this condition, secure the pulley inplace to the lifter drive shaft with two setscrews [6].
6) Secure all pulleys to the lifter drive shaft;then, measure the distance from the baseplate of the compartment to the topsurface of the lifter to make sure that thelifter is level.
Figure 2-59
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-30
5 Orientation of the Deck PickupRoller
When mounting the deck pickup roller [1]at the front, be sure that the marking [2] on thecollar (silver-colored) is at the copier's frontand the marking [3] on the side of the roller isat the copier's rear.
Figure 2-60
Figure 2-61
6 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feed Roller
When mounting the deck pickup/feedroller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is atthe copier's front.
When mounting the pickup/feed rollerrubber to the pickup/feed roller shaft, be surethat the marking [3] is at the copier's rear.
Figure 2-62
When mounting the deck pickup roller[4], be sure that the marking [5] on its insideand the marking [6] on its collar (gold-colored) are at the copier's rear.
[3]
[2][1] (front)
2-31
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
7 Adjusting the Deck SeparationRoller Pressure
If double feeding or pickup failure occurswhen pickup is from the side paper deck,adjust the position of pressure spring of thedeck separation roller.
• If pickup failure occurs, move theposition of the spring in the directionof arrow A.
• If double feeding occurs, move theposition of the spring in the directionof arrow B.
Figure 2-63
A
B
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-32
H. Electrical System
The copier's service mode is used to adjust its electrical mechanisms. Most of them areadjusted at the factory, and require high precision. As a rule, do not make those adjustments that arenot discussed herein.
1 When Replacing the CPU PCB
1) Check the data of ADJUST and OPTION in service mode before replacement, and take notes.Or, back up the data using the downloading tool.
2) Remove the CPU PCB.3) Mount the new CPU PCB.4) Remove the three flash memories and the memory PCB from the old CPU PCB, and mount
them to the new CPU PCB.5) Turn on the power switch.6) Select FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON, R-CON and MMI-COPY in service mode; then,
press the OK key.7) Turn off and then on the power switch.8) Enter the data you took notes of in step 1).9) Execute FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.10) Turn off and then on the power switch.
2 When Replacing the Flash Memory on the CPU PCB
1) Check the data of ADJUST and OPTION in service mode before replacement, and take notes.Or, back up the data using the downloading tool.
2) Detach the old flash memory from the CPU PCB.3) Mount the new flash memory to the CPU PCB.4) Turn on the power switch.5) Select FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON, R-CON and MMI-COPY in service mode; then,
press the OK key.6) Turn off and then on the power switch.7) Enter the data you took notes of in step 1).8) Execute FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.9) Turn off and then on the power switch.
2-33
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3 Adjusting the Laser Power
If you replaced the laser scanner unit, laser driver PCB, or laser controller PCB, enter thevalues attached to the PCB in service mode (ADJUST>LASER). Attach the label behind the rightfront cover for future reference.
If the output of the laser decreases, be sure to adjust the laser power.• Laser power checker (FY9-4013)• Digital multimeter (CK-0436)
Caution:Check the values recorded on the label attached to the right front door.
1) Turn off the power switch.2) Remove the copyboard glass; then, remove the lens base cover and the laser scanner cover.3) Turn on the power switch.4) Open the front left cover. Make sure the front left cover will not close.5) Remove the left inside cover.6) Remove the laser power checker inlet cover.7) Set the laser power checker switch to '2'.8) Holding the laser power checker [1] so that its light-receiving face is on the right, fit it into the
slot [2].9) Insert the probe of the laser power checker into the digital multimeter, and set the range to 200
mV.10) Select FUNCTION>ADJUST>POWER in service mode, and press OK. (laser output)11) Check the reading of the digital multimeter.12) Compare the reading (Pmax) indicated on the label and the measurement. If different, turn
VR2 [3] on the laser driver PCB.
Figure 2-64 Figure 2-65
[2][1]
[3]
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-34
Caution:1. Turn VR2 slowly while monitoring the output of the laser power checker so as to avoid
increasing the laser power excessively. Turning VR2 counterclockwise will decrease thelaser output.
2. Be sure not to exceed the value recorded on the label. Otherwise, the laser diode maybecome damaged.
3. Do NOT press the Copy Start key while making adjustments using VR2.
13) Press the Stop key to stop the laser output.14) Adjust the laser.
4 Adjusting the Laser
Caution:Be sure to adjust the laser power before starting the following work:
1) Select ADJUST>LASER in service mode.2) Select T-V00 and enter '255'; then, press OK.3) Select T-V00-ON, and press OK. (The laser will turn on.) Take notes of the reading (offset). To
stop the laser output, press the Stop key.4) Select T-V00, and adjust T-V00 so that the following is true: offset value + (0.15 to 0.20 mV)5) Likewise, adjust T-VFF, PE-V00, P3-VFF-1, P3-VFF-2, P3-VFF-3, and P3-VFF-4. To stop
the laser output, press the Stop key. Study the following table for an idea of optimum output.
6) Press the Reset key to end service mode.7) Turn off the power switch.
Item
T-V00
T-VFF
P3-V00
P3-VFF-1
P3-VFF-2
P3-VFF-3
P3-VFF-4
Standard (mV)
Offset value + (0.15 to 0.2)
Pmax ×70%
Offset value + (0.1 to 0.15)
Pmax ×45%
Pmax ×55%
Pmax ×65%
Value on label ×70%
Laser ON key
T-V00-ON
T-VFF-ON
P3V00-ON
P3-V1-ON
P3-V2-ON
P3-V3-ON
P3-V4-ON
2-35
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
8) Detach the laser power checker, and secure the slot cover in place.9) Mount the left inside cover.
5
When Replacing the Scanning Lamp, Standard White Plate, LampRegulator, Lamp Reflecting Plate, Analog Processor PCB, No. 1 MirrorBase Unit, No. 1 Mirror, No. 2 Mirror Base Unit, No. 2 Mirror, No. 3 Mirror,and CCD Unit
1) Close the front cover, and wait until the copier enters standby state. (Do not open the frontcover while CCD-ADJ is being executed.)
2) Replace the part, and execute FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.When 'END' appears, end the operation. If 'ERR' appears, start over.
3) Turn off and then on the power switch.
6 When Replacing the BD Unit
If you have replaced the BD unit, adjust the position as follows:1) Set the meter range to VAC.2) Connect the + probe to the check pin (TP301) and the - probe to the check pin GND on the BD
PCB.3) Execute FUNCTION>LASER>POWER in service mode.4) Loosen the screw used to secure the BD unit in place, and tighten it when the output reading of
the meter is maximum.
7 Checking the Environment Measurement PCB
The environment measurement PCB and the environment sensor are checked using theenvironment measurement PCB checker (TKN-0457) and the environment sensor calibrator(TKN-0456).a. Checking the Environment Measurement PCB1) Turn off the power.2) Open the hopper.3) Remove the environment sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and fit the
environment measurement PCB checker (TKN-0457) in its place.4) Insert the door switch actuator, and turn on the power.5) Set the meter range to 30 VDC.
Check to make sure that the voltage between J1-1 (+) and J1-2 (-) on the environmentmeasurement PCB is 24 ± 2.4 V. If not, check the DC power supply PCB(DCP1).
6) Select DISPLAY>ANALOG in service mode.7) Check the temperature and the humidity on the ANALOG screen.
TEMP: 25 ± 5°CABS-HUM: 40 ± 10%
8) Check to make sure that the reading is as indicated.If no, go to step 9).If yes, go to step 14).
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-36
9) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch.10) Disconnect the connector J1 of the environment measurement PCB.11) Turn on the power switch.12) Check the temperature and the humidity on the DISPLAY>ANALOG screen in service mode.
TEMP: 25 ±5°CABS-HUM: 36 ±10%
13) Check to see that the reading is as indicated.If not, suspect a fault on the DC driver PCB or the CPU PCB.
14) Press the Reset key.15) Turn off the power switch.16) Connect the connector J1 to the environment measurement PCB.17) Detach the environment measurement PCB checker from the environment measurement PCB,
and connect the environment sensor in its place.18) Attach all covers.
b. Checking the Environment Sensor1) Check the environment measurement PCB.2) Turn on the power switch, and leave the copier alone for 5 min.3) Check the temperature and the humidity on the DISPLAY>ANALOG screen in service mode,
and record the readings. (data A)TEMP: °C data A1ABS-HUM: % data A2
4) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch.5) Detach the environment sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the
environment sensor calibration tool (TKN-0456) in its place.6) Turn on the power switch, and leave the copier alone for 5 min.7) Check the temperature and the humidity on the DISPLAY>ANALOG screen in service mode,
and take notes of them.TEMP: °C data B1ABS-HUM: % data B2
8) Compare data A and data B.• difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 ± 5.• difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 ± 20If the difference between data A and data B is not as indicated, replace the environment sensor.
9) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch.10) Detach the environment sensor calibrating tool from the environment measurement PCB, and
fit the environment sensor.11) Mount all covers.
Caution:The environment sensor calibration tool (TN-0456) is adjusted at the factory to highprecision. Be sure to store it in an airtight container with a drying agent for storage.
2-37
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
8 Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Value
Perform what follows below for the following:• If you have replaced the copier's paper width detecting VR (including the multifeeder).• If you have adjusted the front/rear registration of the cassette.You need to register a paper width basic value of STMTR and A4R for each cassette; for the
multifeeder, you must register A6R, A4R, and A4.
a. Cassette1) Slide out the cassette for which you want to register the basic value, and set the paper width
guide inside the cassette to A4R.2) Set the cassette in the copier.3) Select FUNCTION>CST in service mode.4) Select a size (C1-A4R, C2-A4R, C3-A4R) for the cassette in question, and press OK.5) See that basic value 1 has been registered.6) Slide out the cassette for which you want to register a basic value, and set the paper width guide
plate inside the cassette to STRMTR.7) Set the cassette in the copier.8) Select FUNCTION>CST in service mode.9) Select a size (C1-STMTR, C2-STMTR, C3-STMTR) for the cassette in question, and press
OK.10) See that basic value 2 has been registered.11) Set the cassette to the size desired by the user.
b. Multifeeder1) Set the width of the multifeeder guide plate to A6R (105 mm).2) Select service mode FUNCTION>CST.3) Select MF-A6R for which you want to register a basic value, and press OK.4) See that basic value 1 has been registered.5) Set the width of the multifeeder guide plate to A4R (210 mm).6) Select MF-A4R for which you want to register a basic value, and press OK.7) See that basic value 2 has been registered.8) Set the width of the multifeeder guide plate to A4 (297 mm).9) Select MF-A4 for which you want to register a basic value, and press OK.10) See that basic value 3 has been registered.
Caution:After registering basic values, be sure to record the values on the service label.
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-38
9 Checking the Surface Potential System
If an image fault has occurred, you must be sure if the cause is in the static latent imageformation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or thedeveloping/transfer system. To that end, the surface potential must be checked as follows:
a. Checking the Surface Potential1) Select FUNCTION>DPC>DPC in service mode (for potential control).2) Check the following using DISPLAY>DPOT in service mode.
Screen display
V00-500
V00-700
VFF-500
VFF-700
Guide
430 to 570
600 to 800
50 to 150
100 to 200
3) If the value is not as indicated, make a zero-level check.
b. Zero-Level CheckYou can make use of a zero-level check to see whether the surface potential control circuit is
good or not, thereby finding out whether the level shift circuit of the DC driver PCB and thepotential measurement unit is good or not.
Reference:A zero-level check is designed to find out whether the CPU reads the surface potential of thedrum as '0' when it is 0 V.
A zero-level check may be either of the following two:Method 1: to find out whether the level shift circuit on the DC driver PCB is good or notMethod 2: to find out whether the potential measurement circuit is good or not
Method 11) Remove the rear cover.2) Turn on the power switch, and wait until the copier is in standby state.3) Disconnect the connector J4 (J440) of the potential measurement PCB.4) Short the check pins J1040-1 and -2 on the DC driver PCB with a jumper wire.5) Check to make sure that the reading of DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT is 100 ± 30 V in service
mode.If yes, the part is normal. Go to step 8).
6) Measure the voltage between GND CP and CP4 of the DC driver PCB to see if it is 0.49 ± 0.1V.If no, suspect a fault in the level shift circuit on the DC driver PCB. If yes, suspect a fault in theA/D converter on the CPU PCB.
7) Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the jumper wire; then, connect the connector.8) Mount the rear cover, and turn on the power switch.
2-39
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Method 21) Turn off the power switch.2) Remove the photosensitive drum unit.3) Fit the potential sensor electrode (TKN-0197) to the potential sensor.
Caution:When fitting the potential sensor electrode to the potential sensor, make sure that magenta ofthe electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor base.
4) Attach the clip of the jumper line to the potential sensor electrode.
Caution:Be sure NOT to let the clip come into contact with the sensor cover. Further, be sure to allowenough distance from the sensor window.
5) Connect one end of the jumper wire to the copier's chassis metal plate (GND) of the copier.6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly.7) Turn on the power switch.
After turning on the power switch, do NOT touch the potential sensor assembly.8) Check to make sure that DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT is 100 ± 30 V in service mode.
Reference:If the reading is as indicated in method 1 but not as indicated in method 2, suspect dirt on thesensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit.If the reading is not as indicated in method 1 and method 2, you may assume that the signalpath from the potential sensor unit to the CPU on the CPU PCB is normal.
9) Turn off the power switch.10) Detach the potential sensor electrode.11) Mount the photosensitive drum unit.12) Turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-40
10 When Replacing the DC Driver PCB
Check the setting of the DIP switch on the old DC driver PCB, and set the DIP switch on thenew DC driver PCB.
In addition, be sure to remove the jumper connector J1050 from the old DC driver PCB, andconnect it to J1050 of the new DC driver PCB.
11 Checking the Photointerrupter
The copier allows the use of its service mode when checking its photointerrupers in addition tothe use of a conventional meter.
1. Using a Meter1) Set the meter range to 30 VDC.2) Connect the - probe of the meter to J101-7 (GND) on the DC driver PCB or J3-3 (GND) on the
deck driver PCB.3) Connect the (+) probe of the meter to the terminals (on the driver PCB) indicated on the pages
that follow.4) Make checks as shown.
2. Using Service Mode1) Select I/O DISPLAY in service mode.2) Bring up the I/O address to check, and make checks as shown.
2-41
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Sensor
PS1Originalscanner HPsensor
PS2Side A sensor
PS3Side B sensor
PS4C sensor
PS5Pre-transfersensor
PS6Post-transfersensor
PS7Separationsensor
PS8Attraction/transferlocking camHP sensor
PS9Multifeederpickup sensor
PS10Fixing oillevel sensor
I/Odisplay
--
--
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
10
Connector No.I/O address
J602-2---------
J1014-B8P009-8
J1014-B7P009-9
J1014-B5P009-10
J1014-B3P001-9
J1014-B2P001-10
J10013-B4P001-11
J1014-B1P009-3
J1017-B10P001-5
J1004-B5P006-4
When the light-blocking plate is atPS1,While the light-blocking plate is notat PS1,
When the light-blocking plate is atPS2,When the light-blocking plate is notat PS2,
When the light-blocking plate is atPS3,When the light-blocking plate is notat PS3,
When the light-blocking-plate is atPS4,When the light-blocking plate is notat PS4,
When paper ispresent over PS5,When paper is absentover PS5,
When paper ispresent over PS6,When paper is absentover PS6,
When paper ispresent over PS7,When paper is absentover PS7,
When cam is not atHP,When cam is at HP,
When paper ispresent over PS9,When paper is absentover PS9,
When oil is present,When oil is absent,
Move the scanner byhand while instandby.
Move the transferdrum by hand whilein standby.
Move the transferdrum by hand whilein standby.
Move the transferdrum by hand whilein standby.
Put paper on thetransfer drum andmove it by hand whilein standby.
Put paper over PS6while in standby.
Put paper over PS7while in standby.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Put paper over PS9while in standby.
Remove PS10 whilein standby.
Voltagereading
5V
0V
5V
0V
0V
5V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V0V
Checks
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-42
Sensor
PS11Fixing uppercleaning beltlength sensor
PS12Internaldeliverysensor
PS15Multi feederpaper sensor
PS17Multifeederlifter H sensor
PS18Multifeederlifter L sensor
PS19(CLC1120/1130)Cassette 1lifter sensor
PS20(CLC1120/1130)Cassette 1paper sensor
PS21(CLC1120/1130)Pickupvertical path 1sensor
PS22/DPS22Cassette 2/1lifter sensor
PS23/DPS23Cassette 3/2lifter sensor
PS24/DPS24Cassette 2/1paper sensor
I/Odisplay
1
0
1
0
1
0
10
10
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Connector No.I/O address
J1004-B2P006-3
J1004-B3P001-13
J1017-B16P002-13
J1017-B13P007-15
J1017-B12P007-14
J1020-B3P007-10
J1020-B5P002-10
J1019-A2P001-2
J1017-A5P007-1
J1018-A3P007-8
J1017-A7P002-9
When paper ispresent over PS11,When paper is absentover PS11,
When paper ispresent over PS12,When paper is absentover PS12
When paper ispresent over PS15,When paper is absentover PS15,
When the lifter isdown,When the lifter is up,
When the lifter isdown,When the lifter is up,
When paper ispresent over PS19,When paper is absentover PS19
When paper ispresent over PS20,When paper is absentover PS20,
When paper ispresent over PS21,When paper is absentover PS21,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When paper ispresent over PS24,While paper is notpresent over PS24,
Put paper over PS11while in standby.
Put paper over PS12while in standby.
Put paper over PS15while in standby.
Move up the lifterwhile in standby.
Move up the lifterwhile in standby.
Put paper over PS19while in standby.
Put paper over PS20while in standby.
Put paper over PS21while in standby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Put paper over PS24while in standby.
Voltagereading
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V0V
5V0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
Checks
2-43
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Sensor
PS25/DPS25Cassette 3/2paper sensor
PS26Pickupvertical path2/1 sensor
PS27Pickupvertical path3/2 sensor
PS28(CLC1150)Re-pickupvertical pathsensor
PS30Pre-registrationsensor
PS31Externaldeliverysensor
PS32(CLC1150)Deliveryvertical path 1sensor
PS33(CLC1150)Deliveryvertical path 2sensor
PS34(CLC1150)Duplexingpath papersensor
PS35(CLC1150)Duplexingreversal papersensor
PS36(CLC1150)Duplexingtray papersensor
I/Odisplay
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Connector No.I/O address
J1018-A5P002-8
J1017-A4P001-1
J1018-A2P001-2
J1019-A2P001-3
J1013-B6P002-15
J1008-B2P001-12
J1029-6P002-0
J1029-11P002-1
J1022-B8P002-3
J1022-B7P002-4
J1022-B6P002-11
When paper ispresent over PS25,When paper is absentover PS25,
When paper ispresent over PS26,When paper is absentover PS26,
When paper ispresent over PS27,When paper is absentover PS27,
When paper ispresent over PS28,When paper is absentover PS28,
When paper ispresent over PS30,When paper is absentover PS30,
When paper ispresent over PS31.When paper is absentover PS31,
Paper is present overPS32,Paper is absent overPS32,
When paper ispresent over PS33,When paper is absentover PS33,
When paper ispresent over PS34,When paper is absentover PS34,
When paper ispresent over PS35,When paper is absentover PS35,
When paper ispresent over PS36,When paper is absentover PS36,
Put paper over PS25while in standby.
Put paper over PS26while in standby.
Put paper over PS27while in standby.
Put paper over PS28while in standby.
Put paper over PS30while in standby.
Put paper over PS31while in standby.
Put paper over PS32while in standby.
Put paper over PS33while in standby.
Put paper over PS34while in standby.
Put paper over PS35while in standby.
Put paper over PS36while in standby.
Voltagereading
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
0V
5V
Checks
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-44
Sensor
PS37(CLC1150)Duplexinginlet papersensor
PS40(CLC1150)Paper joggingguide HPsensor
PS41Right frontcover sensor
PS42Left frontcover sensor
PS43Deliverycover sensor
PS44Pickup coversensor
PS46(CLC120/1130)Cassette 1open/closedsensor
PS47/DPS47Cassette 2/1open/closedsensor
PS48/DPS48Cassette 3/1open/closedsensor
PS49M developingassembly HPsensor
PS51C developingassembly HPsensor
I/Odisplay
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
10
10
Connector No.I/O address
J1022-A3P002-2
J1022-A4P009-4
J1027-B8P004-1
J1027-A8P004-2
J1027-B2P004-0
J1007-B5P004-3
J1020-B2P008-3
J1017-A3P008-2
J1018-A1P008-1
J1016-B2P00A-8
J1015-A3P00A-9
When paper ispresent over PS37,When paper is absentover PS37,
While the guide ispresent over PS40,While the guide isabsent over PS40,
When the cover isclosed,When the cover isopen,
When the cover isclosed,When the cover isopen,
When the cover isclosed,When the cover isopen,
When the cover isclosed,When the cover isopen,
When the cassette isclosed,When the cassette isopen,
When the cassette isclosed,When the cassette isopen,
When the cassette isclosed,When the cassette isopen,
When at HP,When not at HP,
When at HP,When not at HP,
Put paper over PS37while in standby.
Move the guide whilein standby.
Open and close thecover while instandby.
Open and then closethe cover while instandby.
Open and then closethe cover while instandby.
Open and close thecover while instandby.
Open and close thecassette while instandby.
Open and close thecassette while instandby.
Open and close thecassette while instandby.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Voltagereading
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V0V
5V0V
Checks
2-45
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Sensor
PS53Y developingassembly HPsensor
PS55Bk developingassembly HPsensor
PS57Transfer drumHP sensor
PS59Transfer drumcleaner HPsensor
PS62Multifeedertray open/closed sensor
PS67Fixing lowercleaning beltlength sensor
PS68Waste tonercase fullsensor
PS69 (Note)Transparencysensor
PS70 (Note)Registrationsensor
PS71 (Note)Pre-cleaningpaper sensor
PS101Deck pickupsensor
PS102Deck paperabsent sensor
I/Odisplay
10
10
10
10
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Connector No.I/O address
J1016-A2P00A-10
J1015-B3P00A-11
J1002-A2P009-1
J1002-B2P009-2
J1017-B9P004-6
J1004-B1P006-2
J1027-B4P006-6
J1013-B9P001-6
J1013-B8P001-8
J1007-B14P00B-1
J5-B4P001-4
J5-A4P002-12
When at HP,When not at HP,
When at HP,When not at HP,
When at HP,When not at HP,
When at HP,When not at HP,
When the tray isclosed,When the tray isopen,
When paper ispresent over PS67,When paper is absentover PS67,
When paper ispresent over PS68,When paper is absentover PS68,
When paper ispresent over PS69,When pepper isabsent over PS69,
When paper ispresent over PS70,When paper is absentover PS70,
When paper ispresent over PS71,When paper is absentover PS71,
When paper ispresent over PS101,When paper is absentover PS101,
When paper ispresent over PS102,When paper is absentover PS102,
Take measurementsduring copying.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Take measurementsduring copying.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Open and close thetray during standby.
Put paper over PS67while in standby.
Put paper over PS68while in standby.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Take measurementsduring copyingoperation.
Put paper over PS101while in standby.
Put paper over PS102while in standby.
Voltagereading
5V0V
5V0V
5V0V
5V0V
0V
4V
5V
0V
0V
5V
5V
0V
5V
0V
several V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
Checks
Note: The sensor detects paper after the LED of the sensor turns on; normally, ‘1’ is indicated,since the LED is not ON.
CHAPTER 2 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-46
Sensor
PS103Deck lifterupper limitsensor
PS104Deck lifterpositionsensor 18
PS105Deck setsensor
PS107Deck paperlevel uppersensor
PS108Deck paperlevel lowersensor
PS109Deck opensensor
I/Odisplay
0
1
-
-
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
Connector No.I/O address
J5-A7P007-13
J5-A10---------
J6-4P016-14
J4-5P016-12
J4-2P016-11
J6-7P016-15
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the light-blocking plate ispushed,When the light-blocking plate is notpushed,
When the deckassembly is open,When the deckassembly is closed,
Put the light-blockingplate while instandby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Push the light-blocking plate whilein standby.
Release the deckassembly while instandby.
Voltagereading
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
0V
5V
Checks
3-1
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OFELECTRICAL PARTS
A. Sensors
1. CLC1120/1130
Table 3-1a (CLC1120/1130)
Figure 3-1a (CLC1120/1130)
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS15
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS30
PS31
Original scanner home positionsensor
Side A sensor
Side B sensor
C sensor
Pre-transfer paper sensor
Post-transfer paper sensor
Separation sensor
Attraction/transfer locking cam HPsensor
Multifeeder pickup sensor
Fixing oil level sensor
Fixing upper cleaning belt levelsensor
Internal delivery sensor
Multifeeder paper sensor
Multifeeder lifter H sensor
Multifeeder lifter L sensor
Cassette 1 lifter position sensor
Cassette 1 paper sensor
Pickup vertical path 1 sensor
Cassette 2 lifter position sensor
Cassette 3 lifter position sensor(CLC1130 only)
Cassette 2 paper sensor
Cassette 3 paper sensor (CLC1130only)
Pickup vertical path 2 sensor
Pickup vertical path 3 sensor(CLC1130 only)
Pre-registration sensor
External delivery sensor
PS41
PS10
PS12
PS31
PS69L PS69S
PS6
PS5PS7PS11
PS67
PS2 PS3
PS4
PS8
TS1TS4
TS2
TS3
PS71
PS30
PS70LPS70S
PS68LPS68S
3
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-2
Table 3-1b (CLC1120/1130)
Table 3-1b (CLC1120/1130)
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS46
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS51
PS53
PS55
PS57
PS59
PS62
PS67
PS68L/S
PS69L/S
PS70L/S
PS71
PSU2
PSU3
VR2
VR3
VR4
VR5
VR6
VR7
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
UN10
Right front cover sensor
Left front cover sensor
Delivery cover sensor
Pickup cover sensor
Cassette 1 open/closed sensor
Cassette 2 open/closed sensor
Cassette 3 open/closed sensor(CLC1130 only)
M developing assembly HP sensor
C developing assembly HP sensor
Y developing assembly HP sensor
Bk developing assembly HP sensor
Transfer drum HP sensor
Transfer drum cleaner HP sensor
Multifeeder tray open/closessensor
Fixing lower cleaning belt lengthsensor
Waste toner case full sensor
Transparency sensor
Registration sensor
Pre-cleaning paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper length sensor(CLC1120 only)
Cassette 3 paper length sensor(CLC1130 only)
Cassette 1 paper level detectingVR
Cassette 2 paper width detectingVR (CLC1120 only)
Cassette 2 paper level detectingVR
Cassette 3 paper width detectingVR (CLC1130 only)
Cassette 3 paper level detectingVR (CLC1130 only)
Multifeeder paper width detectingVR
M toner level sensor
C toner level sensor
Y toner level sensor
Bk toner level sensor
Environment sensor
VR7
VR5PSU3
PS43
PS1
PS57
PS59
PS42
PS55
PS49
PS51
PS53
PS44
PS9PS62
PS17
PS15
PS18
UN10
PS23PS25
PS48
PS22PS24
PS47
PS19PS20
PS46
PS27
PS26
PS21
VR4
VR2
VR6
3-3
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-2a (CLC1150)
Figure 3-2a (CLC1150)
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS15
PS17
PS18
DPS22
DPS23
DPS24
DPS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
Original scanner home positionsensor
Side A sensor
Side B sensor
C sensor
Pre-transfer paper sensor
Post-transfer paper sensor
Separation sensor
Attraction/transfer locking cam HPsensor
Multifeeder pickup sensor
Fixing oil level sensor
Fixing upper cleaning belt lengthsensor
Internal delivery sensor
Multifeeder paper sensor
Multifeeder lifter H sensor
Multifeeder lifter L sensor
Cassette 1 lifter position sensor
Cassette 2 lifter position sensor
Cassette 1 paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper sensor
Pickup vertical path 1 sensor
Pickup vertical path 2 sensor
Re-picup vertical path sensor
Pre-registration sensor
External delivery paper sensor
Delivery vertical path 1 sensor
Delivery vertical path 2 sensor
Duplexing path paper sensor
Duplexing reversal paper sensor
Duplexing tray paper sensor
2. CLC1150
PS41
PS68LPS68S
PS37
PS10
PS36
PS40
PS34
PS35
PS12
PS32
PS31
PS33
PS6
PS5PS7PS11
PS67
PS2 PS3
PS4
PS8
TS1TS4
TS2
TS3
PS71
PS30
PS70L
PS70S
PS69L PS69S
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-4
Table 3-2b (CLC1150) Figure 3-2b (CLC1150)
PS37
PS40
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
DPS47
DPS48
PS49
PS51
PS53
PS55
PS57
PS59
PS62
PS67
PS68L/S
PS69L/S
PS70L/S
PS71
DPSU3
DVR4
DVR5
DVR6
VR7
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
UN10
Duplexing inlet paper sensor
Paper jogging guide HP sensor
Right front cover sensor
Left front cover sensor
Delivery cover sensor
Pickup cover sensor
Cassette 1 open/closed sensor
Cassette 2 open/closed sensor
M developing assembly HP sensor
C developing assembly HP sensor
Y developing assembly HP sensor
Bk developing assembly HP sensor
Transfer drum HP sensor
Transfer drum cleaner HP sensor
Multifeeder tray open/closedsensor
Fixing lower cleaning belt lengthsensor
Waste toner case full sensor
Transparency sensor
Registration sensor
Pre-cleaning paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper length sensor
Cassette 1 paper level detectingVR
Cassette 2 paper width detectingVR
Cassette 2 paper level detectingVR
Multifeeder paper width detectingVR
M toner level sensor
C toner level sensor
Y toner level sensor
Bk toner level sensor
Environment sensor
DPS23DPS25
DPS48
DPS22DPS24
DPS47
PS27
PS26DVR4
VR7
DVR5DPSU3
DVR6
PS43
PS1
PS57
PS59
PS42
PS55
PS49
PS51
PS53
PS44
PS9PS62
PS17
PS15
PS18
PS28UN10
3-5
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-3
Figure 3-3
THM1
THM2
THM3
THM4
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP6
LA1
LA2
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
ELB
LF1
SSR1
SSR2
RL1
RL3
P1
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
Fixing upper thermistor 1
Fixing upper thermistor 2
Fixing lower thermsitor 3
Fixing lower thermistor 4
Scanner thermal switch 1
Fixing upper thermal switch
Fixing lower thermal switch
Scanner thermal switch 2
Pre-exposure lamp
Scanning lamp
Fixing upper heater
Fixing lower heater
Drum heater
Cassette heater 1
Cassette heater 2
Leakage breaker
Noise filer
Fixing heater SSR
Drum, cassette, deck heater SSR
AC power cut relay
DC power cut relay
Power cord
Power switch
Control switch
Transfer unit lever switch
Left front door switch
Delivery door switch
Environment switch
Waste toner feedscrew lockeddetecting switch
Cassette heater switch
B. Thermistors, Lamps, and Heaters
SW7
RL1
SSR1
SW1
SW3
SW4 SW2
SW5
LF1
RL3SSR2
SW6SW8
H5
H4
P1ELCB
LA1
LA2
TP6
TP1H3
H2
THM1
THM2
TP3
TP2
THM3THM4
H1
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-6
Table 3-4 (CLC1120/1130)
Figure 3-4 (CLC1120/1130)
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
CL6
CL7
CL8
CL9
CL10
CL11
CL12
CL13
CL16
CL18
M developing cylinder clutch
C developing cylinder clutch
Y developing cylinder clutch
Bk developing cylinder clutch
M toner supply clutch
C toner supply clutch
Y toner supply clutch
Bk toner supply clutch
Registration clutch
Multifeeder feeding clutch
Cassette 1 pickup clutch
Cassette 2 pickup clutch
Cassette 3 pickup clutch (CLC1130only)
Multifeeder pickup clutch
Postcard feeding clutch (100-Vmodel only)
C. Clutches
1. CLC1120/1130
CL3
CL10
CL7CL6
CL5CL8
CL11
CL12
CL13
CL16CL9
CL2CL1
CL4
CL18
3-7
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-5 (CLC1150)
Figure 3-5 (CLC1150)
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
CL6
CL7
CL8
CL9
CL10
DCL12
DCL13
CL14
CL15
CL16
CL18
CL19
M developing cylinder clutch
C developing cylinder clutch
Y developing cylinder clutch
Bk developing cylinder clutch
M toner supply clutch
C toner supply clutch
Y toner supply clutch
Bk toner supply clutch
Registration clutch
Multifeeder feeding clutch
Cassette 1 pickup clutch
Cassette 2 pickup clutch
Duplexing feeding clutch
Re-pickup clutch
Multifeeder pickup clutch
Postcard feeding clutch (100-Vmodel only)
Delivery vertical path roller clutch
2. CLC1150
DCL12
CL3
CL10
CL15
CL14
CL7CL6
CL5CL8
CL19
CL16CL9
CL2CL1
CL4
CL18
DCL13
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-8
Table 3-6 (CLC1120/1130)
Figure 3-6 (CLC1120/1130)
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL7
SL8
SL9
SL14
Fixing upper cleaning belt solenoid
Fixing lower cleaning belt solenoid
Separation push-up solenoid
Separation claw solenoid
Registration roller releasingsolenoid
Attraction roller solenoid
Pickup roller 1 solenoid
Pickup roller 2 solenoid
Pickup roller 3 solenoid (CLC1130only)
Multifeeder pickup solenoid
D. Solenoids
1. CLC1120/1130
SL14
SL1
SL2
SL8
SL7
SL9
SL3
SL5SL6
SL4
3-9
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-7 (CLC1150)
Figure 3-7 (CLC1150)
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
DSL8
DSL9
SL10
SL12
SL13
SL14
SL15
Fixing upper cleaning belt solenoid
Fixing lower cleaning belt solenoid
Separation push-up solenoid
Separation claw solenoid
Registration roller releasingsolenoid
Attraction roller solenoid
Pickup roller 1 solenoid
Pickup roller 2 solenoid
Delivery paper deflecting platesolenoid
Stopper plate solenoid
Duplexing paper feed rollersolenoid
Multifeeder pickup solenoid
Stacking guide plate solenoid
2. CLC1150
SL14
SL1
SL2
SL13
SL12
SL15DSL8
DSL9
SL3
SL5SL6
SL4
SL10
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-10
Table 3-8
Figure 3-8
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM11
FM13
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
Original exposure system coolingfan 1
Exhaust discharge fan
Primary charging assembly fan
Laser scanner motor cooling fan
Ozone suction fan
Toner suction fan
IP cooling an
Electrical unit cooling fan
Power supply cooling fan 1
Delivery cooling fan
Power supply cooling fan 2
Original exposure system coolingfan 2
Original exposure system coolingfan 3
Back suction fan
Power cord mount cooling fan
E. Fans
3-11
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-9 (CLC1120/1130) Figure 3-9 (CLC1120/1130)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M15
PM1
PM2
PM3
PM4
PM5
PM6
PM7
PM8
PM9
PM10
PM11
PM12
PM15
Drum motor
Laser scanner motor
Main motor
Fixing motor
Primary charging wire cleaningmotor
Cleaning blade reciprocating motor
Transfer drum cleaning brushmotor
Polishing roller motor
Hopper motor
Cassette 1 lifter motor
Cassette 2 lifter motor
Cassette 3 lifter motor (CLC1130only)
Multifeeder lifter motor
M developing assembly lockingmotor
C developing assembly lockingmotor
Y developing assembly lockingmotor
Bk developing assembly lockingmotor
Transfer drum locking motor
Transfer drum cleaner lockingmotor
Attraction/transfer locking cammotor
Pre-registration motor 2
Pre-registration motor 1
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Cassette 2 pickup motor
Cassette 3 pickup motor (CLC130only)
Original scanner motor
F. Motors
PM11
PM10
PM5
PM6
M5M7
M2PM3
PM2
PM1
PM4
M4
PM12
M13M12
M11
M15
PM8PM9
PM15
M3
M9
M8
M10PM7
M6
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-12
Table 3-10 (CLC1150)
Figure 3-10 (CLC150)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
DM12
DM13
M14
M15
PM1
PM2
PM3
PM4
PM6
PM7
PM8
PM9
DPM11
DPM12
PM13
PM14
PM15
Drum motor
Laser scanner motor
Main motor
Fixing motor
Primary charging wire cleaningmotor
Cleaning blade reciprocating motor
Transfer drum leaner brush motor
Polishing roller motor
Hopper motor
Cassette 1 lifter motor
Cassette 2 lifter motor
Duplexing motor
Multifeeder lifter motor
M developing assembly lockingmotor
C developing assembly lockingmotor
Y developing assembly lockingmotor
Bk developing assembly lockingmotor
Transfer drum cleaner lockingmotor
Attraction/transfer locking cammotor
Pre-registration motor 2
Pre-registration motor 1
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Cassette 2 pickup motor
Re-pickup motor
Duplexing paper jogging motor
Original scanner motor
DPM11
PM13
M14 PM5
PM6
M5M7
M2PM3
PM2
PM1
PM4
M4
DPM12
DM13
DM12
M15
PM14
PM8PM9
PM15
M3
M9
M8
M10PM7
M6
3-13
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-11a
Figure 3-11a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CPU PCB
CCD/CCD driver PCB
Analog processor PCB
Image processor motherboard
Image processor main PCB
Image processor ECO PCB
ECO relay PCB
Laser controller PCB
Laser drive PCB
BD PCB
Original scanner motor driver PCB
Control panel PCB
Inverter PCB
Contrast VR PCB
Keypad PCB
ECO PCB
Memory PCB
Bi-Centronics I/F PCB
DC driver PCB
DC power supply PCB
AC fuse PCB
DC fuse PCB
Drum heater controller PCB
Oil pump driver PCB
Transfer driver PCB
Registration path driver PCB
Pickup driver PCB
Duplexing driver PCB (CLC1150only)
Developing assembly lockingdriver PCB
Transfer assembly locking driverPCB
G. PCBs
[2]
[15]
[15]
[10][36]
[34]
[38]
[23]
[25]
[39]
[19]
[35]
[33]
[32]
[28]
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-14
Table 3-11b
Figure 3-11b
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Developing bias PCB
HVT-AC PCB
HVT-DC PCB
Potential measurement PCB
Main motor driver PCB
Laser scanner motor PCB
Hopper motor PCB
IP-ED/IF PCB (accessory)
IP-PRJ PCB (accessory)
Flicker controller PCB (230-Vmodel only)
Transformer PCB
[11]
[16] [41]
[12]
[8]
[29][9]
[3]
[13]
[5]
[14]
[26]
[37]
[18][7]
[6]
[22][20]
[31]
[21]
[1]
[27]
[32]
[24][40]
[17]
3-15
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
Table 3-12
Figure 3-12
PS101
PS102
PS103
PS104
PS105
PS107
PS108
PS109
SW100
SW101
SW102
Deck pickup sensor
Deck paper absent sensor
Deck lifter upper limit sensor
Deck position sensor
Deck set sensor
Deck paper level upper sensor
Deck paper level lower sensor
Deck open sensor
Deck open switch
Deck open detecting switch
Deck lifter lower limit detectingswitch
H. Paper Deck
1. Sensors and Switches
SW102
SW101PS101
PS105
PS104
PS102
PS103
PS107 SW100
PS109
PS108
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-16
Table 3-13
Figure 3-13
PM101
M101
CL102
SL101
SL102
[1]
[2]
Deck pickup motor
Deck lifter motor
Deck pickup clutch
Deck pickup solenoid
Deck open solenoid
Deck driver PCB
Deck open switch PCB
2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs
PM101
SL102
M101
SL101
[2]
[1]
CL102
3-17
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
I. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), andCheck Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the copier,those that may be used in the field are discussed.
Caution:1. Some LEDs emit light even when off because of leakage current. It is a normal condition,
and must be kept in mind.2. VRs that may be used in the field:
VRs that must not be used it the field:3. The VRs and check pins that are not found in the tables are for the factory only, and require
special tools and high accuracy. Do NOT touch them in the field.
1. DC Driver PCB
VR2
VR1 J1040
J1030
J1029J1022J1023J1024
LED1
1
15
112
17
28
2
J100
1
J1053
J105251
5131
J1051
7
1
ON
2
1
J1050
SW1
J1026A1 A15
B15 B1
J1027J1028
J1025A1 A10
B10 B1
A1
A8
A1
A10 A1 A12
B10 B1
A1 A10
B12 B1
B1
B8
J100
2
A10
A1
B1
B10
J100
5
A10
A1
B1
B1B
2A1A2
B49 B50 A49 A
50B
10
J100
4J1
006
B1
B13
A1
A12
A13
A1
B1
A1
A18
B18
B1
J101
5J1
016
J101
7A
1A
16
B16
B1
J101
8A
1A
12
B1
B9
B1
B12 J1
019
A1
A9
B13
J102
0A
1A
13B1
J102
1
A1
A10
B10
B1
B1B10
J1007
A1A18
B1 B18
J1008
A1A8
B8B1
J1011
A1A12
J1012
A1A13
J1013
A1A17
J1014
A1A11
B12B1B13B1B17B1B11B1J1009J1010
41
91
1 13
2 14
B12
(OLD TYPE)
1
ON
2
SW1
(NEW TYPE)
Figure 3-14
LED: turns on when +24 V is supplied, and turns off when the front cover is opened.
SW1-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Remarks
Normal area
Highland 1
Highland 2
OUT
Normal
Case 1
Case 2
Not used
Table 3-14
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-18
Caution:If the copier is used in highlands (low atmospheric pressure), images may suffer from transferfaults. Try changing the setting of the DIP switch (SW1) to highland 1, and see if the problemis corrected; if the problem still occurs, switch SW1 to highland 2.If the problem still remains thereafter, shift SW1 back to its normal setting, and try to checkother possible causes.
2. CPU PCB
Figure 3-15
LED1: turns on when +5 V is supplied.LED2: turns on when +24 V is supplied.
3. IP main PCB
VR1
LED1
LED2
J2001J2002 J2003 J20041 4
B2B1
B14B15
A34
A33
A2
A1
B34
B33
B2
B1
A34
A33
A2
A1
B34
B33
B2
B1
A2A1
A50A49
B1B2
B49B50
A1A2
A29A30
B1B2
B29B30
A1
A2
A49
A50
B1
B2
B49
B50
A1
A2
A9
A10
B10B
9B
1B
2
A34
A33
A2
A1
B34
B33
B2
B1
A34
A33
A2
A1
B34
B33
B2
B1
A2
A1
A9
A8
B9
B8
B2
B1
A1A2
A33A34
B1B2
B33B34
A1A2
A33A34
B1B2
B33B34
A14A15
A2A1
B2B1
B8B9
A8A9
A2A1
B1B2
B9B10
A10A9
A2A1
B1B2
B19B20
A20A19
A2A1
B2B1
B16B17
A16A17
A2A1
J2005 J2006
J205
1J2
052
1
1
1 5 1 4 1 6
32
98J2
007
J21
J20
J24
J25
J2010 J2009
J9 J6 J2
1J1
A1 A15
A15 A1
J30
J23
J22
J2011J20122 8
1 7
J205
3J2
012
1 9
J214 J215
J216
J217
5251 100
995049
B1B2A1A2
B1B2A1A2
B49B50A49A50
B39B40A39A40
21
21
32 1J21132 1 J212 J21332 1
1415 J2182
11415
Figure 3-16
3-19
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
4. Analog Processor PCB
Figure 3-17
5. Laser Driver PCB
1 11J2102
J210
0J2
101
B24
A24B
25
A25
B2
B1
A2 A1
1 6J2104 1 13J2103
8 1J2105
Figure 3-18
VR2: for Pmax adjustment of the laser.
1 14
J1302
1 16
J1303
J130
4
A15
B15
J130
1
81
A1
B1
VR1VR2
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-20
6. Lamp Regulator PCB
Figure 3-19
7. DC Fuse PCB1
3J1
0
41
J9
VR2
J450
110
VR1
6 1
J931
71
J932
21
J910
J936
J930
18
12
41
J906
1 5J9396
3
J907
1 6
J909
J905
3 1
4 2
1 8
J933J908
1 10
J934
1 9
J935
1FU939
FU940
FU926
FU
941
FU
921
FU
922
FU
925
FU
904
FU
905
FU
906
FU
901
FU
923
FU
924
FU
903
FU
935
FU
934
FU
932
FU
933
FU931
FU936
FU937
FU938
4
4
1J929
4
2
3
1J937
2 1J938
Figure 3-20
3-21
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
8. AC Fuse PCB
Figure 3-21
9. Developing Bias PCB
J5 FU1011
2
1 3J405
101
J406
J401
1 2J404
VR509
J402
71
J400
41
VR508
VR505
VR504
VR506
VR507
VR503
VR502
VR501
Figure 3-22
CHAPTER 3 ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
3-22
10. HVT-AC PCB
Figure 3-23
11. Potential Measurement PCB
VR102
VR101V
R103
10 1
51
J421
J106
J105
21
J104
61
J103
Figure 3-24
LED1: remains on while the surface potential of the drum is being measured.
1 4
J3
1 4
J2
1 5
J1
VR1
VR2
LED1
4-1
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
A. Outline
The copier's service mode consists of three levels, each using its own screen: Initial screen,Level 1/Level 2 item Screen, and Level 3 item screen.
( )(2,8)( )
User screen
Initial screen
Level 1/Level 2 item screen
Level 3 item screen
Level 3 item screen
Level 3 item screen
Level 3 item screen
Reset key
Reset key
Select an item.
From Level 1/Level 2 item screen
Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen.Select a Level 2 item from the list.
Previous/Next page Previous/Next page Previous/Next page
Figure 4-1 Organization of Screens
4
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-2
The copier's service mode consists of the following seven:
Figure 4-2 Division of Service Mode
1. Starting Service Mode and Making Selections1) Press the asterisk key on the control panel.2) Press '2' and '8' on the keypad at the same time.3) Press the asterisk key on the control key.• The above operations will bring up the following Initial screen:
Figure 4-3 Initial Screen
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
PRJ
DISPLAY
I/O
ADJUST
FUNCTION
OPTION
TEST
COUNTER
EDITOR
Control/display mode
I/O display mode
Adjustment mode
Operation/inspection mode
Settings mode
Test print mode
Counter mode
Service mode of the copier
Service mode of the RDF*
Service mode of the sorter*
Service mode of the projector*
Service mode of the editor*
*Only if installed.
4-3
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Figure 4-4 Service Label
Service label
2. Ending Service Mode• Press the Reset key once to bring back the service mode Initial screen (Figure 4-3).• Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and to bring back the User screen (standard
screen).
Caution:If you used ADJUST, FUNCTION, or OPTION in service mode, be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch after ending service mode.
3. Backing Up the RAMAt time of shipment from the factory, each machine is adjusted individually and its adjustment
values are recorded on the service label (one of the two labels attached to the service data sheetcover behind the front cover).
If you have replaced the CPU PCB or initialized the RAM, be sure to record all service modevalues (ADJUST/OPTION) of the service label. (The values will return to default values uponreplacement or initialization.)
If you cannot find an appropriate heading on service label 1, make use of the blanks of servicelabel 2.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-4
Back-Up Data Items
ADJ-XY
CCD
LASER
DENS
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
ADJ-S
ADJ-J
EC-B
EC-G
EC-R
T-V00
T-VFF
P3-V00
P3-VFF-1
P3-VFF-2
P3-VFF-3
P3-VFF-4
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C
REF-Y
REF-M
REF-C
SIGG-Y
SIGG-M
SIGG-C
RGAIN-K
D-Y-TRGT
D-M-TRGT
D-C-TRGT
PTOFST-Y
PTOFST-M
PTOFST-C
PTOFST-K
D-REF-Y
D-REF-M
D-REF-C
D-REF-K
D-REF-4
D-SGNL-Y
Adjust
4-5
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
DENS
V-CONT
PASCAL
COLOR
D-SGNL-M
D-SGNL-C
D-SGNL-K
D-SGNL-4
P-REF-Y
P-REF-M
P-REF-C
P-REF-K
P-SGNL-Y
P-SGNL-M
P-SGNL-C
P-SGNL-K
SIGG-K
SIGG-P-Y
SIGG-P-M
SIGG-P-C
SIGG-P-K
RGAN-P-Y
RGAN-P-M
RGAN-P-C
RGAN-P-K
VBACK-Y
VBACK-M
VBACK-C
VBACK-K
EPOTOFST
PF-CRT-Y
PF-CRT-M
PF-CRT-C
PF-CRT-K
OFST-P-Y
OFST-P-M
OFST-P-C
OFST-P-K
ADJ-Y
ADJ-M
ADJ-C
ADJ-K
OFST-Y
Adjust
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-6
COLOR
HV-TR
HV-SP
OFST-M
OFST-C
OFST-K
P-ADJ-Y
P-ADJ-M
P-ADJ-C
P-ADJ-K
P-OFST-Y
P-OFST-M
P-OFST-C
P-OFST-K
TR-TR
TR-L1
HV-L2
TR-N1
TR-N2
TR-T1
TR-T2
TR-UT1
TR-UT2
TR-S1-1
TR-S2-1
TR-OHP
TR-POST
HV-SP
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
SP-ON-N1
SP-ON-N2
SP-ON-L1
Adjust
4-7
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-SP
HV-IEL
HV-ATT
DOC-REC
SP-ON-L2
SP-ON-T1
SP-ON-T2
SP-ONUT1
SP-ONUT2
SP-ON-S1
SP-ON-S2
SP-ONOHP
SP-ON-PT
HV-IEL
IEL-L1
IEL-L2
IEL-N1
IEL-N2
IEL-T1
IEL-T2
IEL-UT1
IEL-UT2
IEL-S1-1
IEL-S2-1
IEL-OHP
IEL-POST
HV-ATT
ATT-L1
ATT-L2
ATT-N1
ATT-N2
ATT-T1
ATT-T2
ATT-S1
ATT-S2
ATT-OHP
ATT-UT1
ATT-UT2
ATT-POST
DA-XS
DA-XE
DA-YS
DA-YE
Adjust
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-8
DOC-REC
FEED-ADJ
CST-ADJ
MISC
SENS-ADJ
DS-DOC
ATT-T-A
ATT-T-B
RG-XA
RG-XB
RG-Y
TR-DLY-A
TR-DLY-B
TR-END-A
TR-END-B
C2-STMTR
C2-A4R
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
C1-LVOL
C1-HVOL
C2-LVOL
C2-HVOL
C3-LVOL
C3-HVOL
SEG-ADJ
K-ADJ
ATT-RTN1
ATT-RTN2
ATT-RTN3
ATT-RTN4
BC-ADJ
ACS-ADJ
CLN-TH
CLN-TMP
Adjust
4-9
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-SP-AC
HV-PSTCL
FEEDER
PRJ
HV-SP
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
HV-PSTCL
ADJ-RX
ADJ-RY
ADJ-DX
ADJ-DY
DS-PRJ
DS-OHP
RD-XS
RD-XE
RD-YS
RD-YE
DA-XS
DA-XE
DA-YS
DA-YE
NEGA-B
NEGA-G
NEGA-R
POSI-B
POSI-G
POSI-R
N-LMT
N-G-LMT
P-LMT
P-G-LMT
Adjust
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-10
PRJ
EDITOR
OHP-LMT
P-DA-XS
P-DA-XE
P-DA-YS
P-DA-YE
N-DA-XS
N-DA-XE
N-DA-YS
N-DA-YE
O-DA-XS
O-DA-XE
O-DA-YS
O-DA-YE
CHNGR-X
CHNGR-Y
ED-X
ED-Y
LOOP-MB
LOOP-TH
MRK-MB
MRK-TH
Adjust
4-11
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
BODY
USER
CST
ACC
INT-FACE
CCD-DISP
MODEL-SZ
RCPR-MD
F-WEB
PASCAL
PSCL-MD
EC-GLASS
PSTCL-ON
METAL
OHP-MODE
COPY-LIM
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
CONTROL
COLDOFST
MONO-SPD
CLR-L-SP
PRJ-L-SP
BKL-L-SP
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
COIN
DK-P
REMOTE
B-CLR
P-PRT-MF
Option
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-12
4. Basic Operationa. Initial Screen
Figure 4-5
b. Level 1/Level 2 Item Screen
Figure 4-6
4-13
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
c. Level 3 Item Screen
Figure 4-7
<VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY >
DC-CON
R-CON
PANEL
SCANNER
ECO
FEEDER
SORTER
IMG-CNT
READY:
JAM:SERVICE:WAITING:DOOR:COPYING:ERROR:NO-TONER:NO-OIL:WINR-FUL:
Level 2 items
Level 3 items
To previous page
To next page
Number of pages
ready for servicing/copying operation.jam exists.executing service operation.executing warm-up operation.door is open.performing copying operation.error exits.toner is absent.fixing oil is absent.waste toner case is full.
(yyyyy) {aaaaa-bbbbb}
+/- OK
ADJ-X
Press an item to highlight. Before change
Input value
Numerical input range
Accept input value
Reverse +/0
Stop
Clear
Start
key: use it to stop the ongoing operation.
key: use it to clear a value.
key: use it to make a copy without ending service mode.
Figure 4-8
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-14
B. DISPLAY (control display mode)
COPIER>DISPLAY Items
Level 1 item
DISPLAY
Level 2 item
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
ANALOG
CST-STS
JAM
ERR
CCD
Level 3 item
DC-CONR-CONPANELSCANNERECOFEEDERSORTERIMG-CNT
LANGUAGE
FEEDERSORTERDECKPRJEDITORPS-XJCARDDATA-CON
TEMPHUMABS-HUMFIX-UC
FIX-LC
FIX-UE
FIX-LE
WIDTH-C2WIDTH-C3WIDTH-MF
BAR-CODETARGET-BTARGET-GTARGET-RGAIN-U-BGAIN-U-GGAIN-U-ROFST-OBOFST-OGOFST-OROFST-EBOFST-EGOFST-ER
Description
ROM version of the DC controllerROM version of the reader controllerROM version of the control panel controllerROM version of the scanner motorROM version of the ECO PCBROM version of the feeder controllerROM version of the sorter controllerROM version of the external image controller
language used
state of connection of the feederstate of connection of the sorterstate of connection of the paper deckstate of connection of the projectorstate of connection of the editorstate of connection of the PS-XJstate of insertion of the control cardstate of connection of the copy data controller
machine internal temperature (environment sensor)machine internal humidity (environment sensor)machine internal absolute humiditytemperature (THM1) of the middle of the fixingupper rollertemperature (THM3) of the middle of the fixinglower rollertemperature (THM2) of the ends of the fixingupper rollertemperature (THM4) of the ends of the fixinglower rollerpaper width of cassette 2paper width of cassette 3 (if CLC1150, cassette 2)paper width of the multifeeder
history of jams
history of errors
bar code value of the standard white PLATEshading target value for BLUEshading target value for GREENshading target value for REDgain increase of BLUEgain increase of GREENgain increase of REDoffset adjustment value of BLUE-ODDoffset adjustment value of GREEN-ODDoffset adjustment value of RED-ODDoffset adjustment value of BLUE-EVENoffset adjustment value of GREEN-EVENoffset adjustment value of RED-EVEN
4-15
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
DPOT
GAIN-OBGAIN-OGGAIN-ORGAIN-EBGAIN-EGGAIN-ERCCD-TYPEMETAL
BOF-OBBOF-OGBOF-ORBOF-EBBOF-EGBOF-ERLAMP-DAT
DPOTV00-YV00-MV00-CV00-KVFF-YVFF-MVFF-CVFF-KVDC-YVDC-MVDC-CVDC-KVG-YVG-MVG-CVG-KVCONT-YVCONT-MVCONT-CVCONT-KVBACK-YVBACK-MVBACK-CVBACK-KV00-500
V00-700
VFF-500
VFF-700
DV00-500
DV00-700
DVFF-500
gain adjustment value of LUE-ODDgain adjustment value of GREEN-ODDgain adjustment value of RED-ODDgain adjustment value for BLUE-EVENgain adjustment value for GREEN-EVENgain adjustment value for RED-EVENindicates type (CCD/analog processor)indicates the result of automatic adjustment (normalmode/precious metal mode)black offset value for BLUE-ODDblack offset value for GREEN-ODDblack offset value for RED-ODDblack offset value for BLUE-EVENblack offset value for GREEN-EVENblack offset value for RED-EVENdata value of activation voltage for the scanninglamp
surface potential (V) of the photosensitive drumsetting (V) of Y at laser output 00setting (V) of M at laser output 00setting (V) of C at laser output 00setting (V) of Bk at laser output 00setting (V) of Y at laser output FFsetting (V) of M at laser output FFsetting (V) of C at laser output FFsetting (V) of Bk at laser output FFsetting (V) of Y for developing bias DC componentsetting (V) of M for developing bias DC componentsetting (V) of C for developing bias DC componentsetting (V) of Bk for developing bias DC componentsetting (V) of Y for grid biassetting (V) of M for grid biassetting (V) of C for grid biassetting (V) of Bk for grid biassetting (V) of Y for target contrast potentialsetting (V) of M for target contrast potentialsetting (V) of C for target contrast potentialsetting (V) of Bk for target contrast potentialsetting (V) of Y for de-fogging potentialsetting (V) of M for de-fogging potentialsetting (V) of C for de-fogging potentialsetting (V) of for de-fogging potentialsetting of drum surface potential at laser V00 whilethe primary charging assembly is at -500 Vsetting of drum surface potential at laser VFF whilethe primary charging assembly is at -700 Vsetting of drum surface potential at laser V00 whilethe primary charging assembly is at -500 Vsetting of drum surface potential at laser VFF whilethe primary charging assembly is at -700 Vdark area potential attenuation (V) at laser V00while the drum surface potential is at 500 Vdark area potential attenuation (V) at laser V00while the drum surface potential is at 700 Vdark area potential attenuation (V) at laser VFFwhile the drum surface potential is at 500 V
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-16
DENS
DVFF-700
PFF-YPFF-MPFF-CPFF-K
DENS-Y
DENS-M
DENS-C
DENS-K
WINDOW-YWINDOW-MWINDOW-CWINDOW-KDMAX-Y
DMAX-M
DMAX-C
DMAX-K
FFRATE-Y
FFRATE-M
FFRATE-C
FFRATE-K
PTOFST-Y
PTOFST-M
PTOFST-C
PTOFST-K
D-Y-TRGTD-M-TRGTD-C-TRGTREF-Y
REF-M
dark area potential attenuation (V) at laser VFFwhile the drum surface potential is at 700 Vsetting of laser pulse width for Ysetting of laser pulse width for Msetting of laser pulse width for Csetting of laser pulse width for Bk
result of computation of the developer concentrationinside the Y developing assemblyresult of computation of the developer concentrationinside the M developing assemblyresult of computation of the developer concentrationinside the C developing assemblyresult of computation of the developer concentrationinside the Bk developing assemblywindow soiling coefficient of Ywindow soiling coefficient of Mwindow soiling coefficient of Cwindow soiling coefficient of Bksolid density of Y at time of auto gradationcorrectionsolid density of M at time of auto gradationcorrectionsolid density of C at time of auto gradationcorrectionsolid density of Bk at time of auto gradationcorrectioncorrection value of Y used to set the maximum tonerdensity while gradation characteristics are beingcontrolled for stabilizationcorrection value of M used to set the maximum tonerdensity while gradation characteristics are beingcontrolled for stabilizationcorrection value of C used to set the maximum tonerdensity while gradation characteristics are beingcontrolled for stabilizationcorrection value of Bk used to set the maximumtoner density while gradation characteristics arebeing controlled for stabilizationoffset value of laser strength for Y patch imagedensity correctionoffset value of laser strength for M patch imagedensity correctionoffset value of laser strength for C patch imagedensity correctionoffset value of laser strength for Bk patch imagedensity correctiontarget value for Y developer concentrationtarget value for M developer concentrationtarget value for C developer concentrationmeasurement of the concentration reference signalinside the Y developing assembly (present value;direct light from LED)measurement of the concentration reference signalinside the M developing assembly (present value;direct light from LED)
4-17
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
SENSOR
REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C
PT-REF-Y
PT-REF-M
PT-REF-C
PT-REF-K
PT-SIG-Y
PT-SIG-M
PT-SIG-C
PT-SIG-K
PT-SIG-D
PT-REF-D
DMAX70-Y
DMAX70-M
DMAX70-C
DMAX70-K
SC-HPITOP-AITOP-BWEBW-TONER
measurement of the concentration reference signalinside the C developing assembly (present value;direct light from LED)measurement of the present Y developerconcentration (present value)measurement of the present M developerconcentration (present value)measurement of the present C developerconcentration (present value)concentration reference signal for Y toner on thephotosensitive drumconcentration reference signal for M toner on thephotosensitive drumconcentration reference signal for C toner on thephotosensitive drumconcentration reference signal for Bk toner on thephotosensitive drumconcentration signal of Y toner on the photosensitivedrum (present value)concentration signal of M toner on the photosensitivedrum (present value)concentration signal of C toner on the photosensitivedrum (present value)concentration signal of Bk toner on thephotosensitive drum (present value)reflection intensity signal of the photosensitive drumsurface (present value)reflection intensity reference signal of thephotosensitive drum surfacesolid concentration of Y at laser pulse width 70%during auto gradation correctionsolid concentration of M at laser pulse width 70%during auto gradation correctionsolid concentration of C at laser pulse width 70%during auto gradation correctionsolid concentration of Bk at laser pulse width 70%during auto gradation correction
output of the original scanner HP sensor (PS1)output of the side A sensor (PS2)output of the side B sensor (PS3)fixing cleaning belt is absentwaste toner case is full
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-18
PRJ>DISPLAY Items
Level 1 item
DISPLAY
Level 2 item Level 3 item
CHANGERTRAYT-KINDT-SETT-MOVET-M-ERRT-HP-ERRT-L-MOVET-POSL-MOVEM-EXCTL-POSLAMP-ERR
INITIALLOCALR/L
Description
auto changer (0: absent, 1: present)slide tray (0: absent, 1: present)tray type (0: 80, 1: 40)slide (0: absent, 1: present)tray (0: stationary, 1: moving)tray movement error (0: normal, 1: error)tray HP error (0: normal, 1: error)tray local movement (0: stationary, 1: moving)tray position (0: HP, 1: not HP)lens movement (0: stationary, 1: moving)motor excitation (0: normal, 1: excited)lens position (0: HP, 1: not HP)lamp open circuit detection (0: normal, 1: shortcircuit)initialization (0: normal, 1: initializing)local operation (0: normal, 1: operating)0: remote, 1: local
EDITOR>DISPLAY Items
Level 1 item
DISPLAY
Level 2 item Level 3 item
ED-X
ED-Y
Description
input coordinates in editor sub scanning (X)directioninput coordinates in editor main scanning (Y)direction
VERSIONIndicates the ROM version of the PCBs of the copier and its accessories.
Display <XX. YY>
R&D numberVersion number
Level 3
DC-CON
R-CON
PANEL
SCANNER
ECO
FEEDER
SORTER
IMG-CNT
RemarksDescription
Indicates the version of the flash memory of the DC-CPU.
Indicates the version of the flash memory on the R-CPU.
Indicates the version of the flash memory on thePANEL-CPU.
Indicates the version of the CPU (IC8) on the originalscanner motor driver PCB.
Indicates the version of the ROM (IC2) on the ECOPCB.
Indicates the version of the ROM on the feedercontroller.
Indicates the version of the ROM on the sortercontroller.
Indicates the version of the ROM on the externalimage controller.
4-19
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
USER COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates items related to the User screen and the user.
Level 1
LANGUAGE
Remarks
Display<LANGUAGE xxyy-zz.aa>
Description
Indicates the language used/paper size configuration.
xx (first 2 digits): country codeyy (last 2 digits): language codezz: destination code (00: CANON, 01: OEM)aa: paper size configuration code
Code
00
01
02
03
Configuration
AB
Inch
A
All sizes
ACC-STSIndicates the state of connection of accessories.
Level 3
FEEDER
SORTER
DECK
PRJ
EDITOR
PS-XJ
CARD
DATA-CON
Remarks
0: not connected1: connected
Description
Indicates the sate of connection of the feeder.
Indicates the state of connection of the sorter.
Indicates the state of connection of the paper deck.
Indicates the state of connection of the projector.
Indicates the state of connection of the editor.
Indicates the state of connection of the PS-XJ.
Indicates the state of insertion of a control card.
Indicates the state of connection of the copy datacontroller.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-20
ANALOG COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates the measurements taken by the analog sensor.
Level 1
TEMP
HUM
ABS-HUM
FIX-UC
FIX-LC
FIX-UE
FIX-LE
Remarks
Unit: °C
Unit: %RH
Unit: g
Unit: °C
Unit: °C
Unit: °C
Unit: °C
Description
Indicates the machine internal temperature(environment sensor).
Indicates the machine internal humidity (movementsensor).
Indicates the machine internal absolute humidity.
Indicates the temperature (THM1) of the middle ofthe fixing upper roller.
Indicates the temperature (THM3) of the middle ofthe fixing lower roller.
Indicates the temperature (THM2) of the ends of thefixing upper roller.
Indicates the temperature (THM4) of the ends of thefixing lower roller.
CST-STSIndicates the paper size of the cassette/multifeeder.
Level 1
WIDTH-C2
WIDTH-C3
WIDTH-MF
Remarks
Unit: mm (decimal places areomitted)
Description
Indicates the paper switch of the cassette 2 (CLC1120only).
Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 (forCLC1150, cassette 2).
Indicates the paper width of the multifeeder.
4-21
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
JAM COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates jam data.
< JAM > < 1/8 > < READY >
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
Figure 4-9
Item
AAA
BBBB
CCCC
DDDD
E
FFff
G
HHHHHH
IIIII
Remarks
1 to 64 (64 jams max.)
0: copier1: feeder2: sorter
FF: type of jam (Table 13-701)ff: sensor (Table 13-702)
See Table 13-703.
USER: non-default sizePCARDR: post card
Description
Indicates the order of jams (higher the number, olderthe jam).
----
----
----
Indicates the location of the jam.
Jam code
Indicates the source of paper.
Indicates the soft counter for the source of paper.
Indicates the size of paper.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-22
xx01*
xx02*
xx03*
xx04*
xx05
xx06
xx09
xx10
xx11
xx12
0020
xx30
xx40
Jam sensor
pickup vertical path sensor (PS27)
pickup vertical path sensor (PS26)
pickup vertical path sensor 1 (PS21)
re-pickup vertical path sensor (PS28)
deck pickup sensor (PS101)
multifeeder pickup sensor (PS9)
pickup vertical path sensor (PS27)
pickup vertical path sensor 2 (PS26)
pickup vertical path sensor 1 (PS21)
re-pickup vertical path sensor (PS28)
transparency sensor (PS69)
pre-registration sensor (PS30)
registration sensor(PS70)
Code
xx50
xx51
0052
xx60
xx61
xx70
xx80
xx81
xx82
xx83
xx84
xx90
Jam sensor
post-transfer paper sensor (PS6)
pre-transfer paper sensor (PS5)
pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71)
separation sensor (PS7)
internal delivery paper sensor (PS12)
external delivery sensor (PS31)
delivery vertical path sensor 1 (PS32)
delivery vertical path sensor 1 (PS33)
duplexing inlet paper sensor (PS37)
duplexing path paper sensor (PS34)
duplexing path reversal paper sensor(PS35)
buffer path unit sensor assembly
FF: Type of Jam COPIER>DISPLAY
Table 4-1
ff: Jam Sensor
* Detection at time of pickup.
Table 4-2a
Code
00xx
01xx
02xx
03xx
Type
Feeder
delay
stationary
remaining
Code
04xx
05xx
EExx
FFxx
Type
service mode
sorter
service call
door open
4-23
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
ff: Detail of Sorter Jam COPIER>DISPLAY
Table 4-2b
G: Source of Paper
Code
xx03
xx04
xx06
xx07
Type
feeding delay
feeding stationary
staple jam
power-on jam
Code
xx08
xx09
xx0A
Type of jam
door open jam (paper present)
door open jam (paper absent)
bin outside jam
Code
1
2
3
4
5
Description
cassette 1
cassette 2
cassette 3
not used
not used
Code
6
7
8
9
Description
not used
paper deck
multifeeder
duplexing unit
Table 4-3
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-24
ERR COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates error codes.
< ERR > < 1/4 > < READY >
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
Figure 4-10
Level 3
AAA
BBBB
CCCC
DDDD
EEEE
FFff
G
HH
Remarks
1 to 32 (32 max.)
See "Self Diagnosis."
If none, '0000'.
0: copier1: feeder2: sorter
Description
Indicates the order of errors (the higher the number,the older the error).
----
----
----
Indicates the error code.
Indicates the detail code.
Indicates the location of the error.
alarm code (not used: indicates '00')
4-25
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
CCD COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates the measurements related to the CCD.
Level 3
BAR-CODE
TARGET-B
TARGET-G
TARGET-R
GAIN-U-B
GAIN-U-G
GAIN-U-R
OFST-OB
OFST-OG
OFST-OR
OFST-EB
OFST-EG
OFST-ER
GAIN-OB
GAIN-OG
GAIN-OR
GAIN-EB
GAIN-EG
GAIN-ER
CCD-TYPE
METAL
BOF-OB
BOF-OG
BOF-OR
BOF-EB
BOF-EG
BOF-ER
LAMP-DAT
Remarks
Indicated only whenFUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ has been executed.
(3: CLC1100 only)
0: normal mode1: precious metal mode
0 to 999
Description
bar code value of the standard white plate
shading target value of BLUE
shading target value of GREEN
shading target value of RED
gain increase value of BLUE
gain increase value of GREEN
gain increase value of RED
offset adjustment value of BLUE-OD
offset adjustment value of GREEN-ODD
offset adjustment value of RED-ODD
offset adjustment value of BLUE-EVEN
offset adjustment value of GREEN-EVEN
offset adjustment value of RED-EVEN
gain adjustment value of BLUE-ODD
gain adjustment value of GREEN-ODD
gain adjustment value of RED-ODD
gain adjustment value of BLUE-EVEN
gain adjustment value of GREEN-EVEN
gain adjustment value of RED-EVEN
type (CCD/analog processor)
result of automatic adjustment (normal mode/precious metal mode)
black offset value of BLUE-ODD
black offset value of GREEN-ODD
black offset value of RED-ODD
black offset value of BLUE-EVEN
black offset value of GREEN-EVEN
black offset value of RED-EVEN
original scanning lamp activation voltage for CVR
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-26
DPOT COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates the control data for the surface potential of the photosensitive drum.
Level 3
DPOT
V00-Y
V00-M
V00-C
V00-K
VFF-Y
VFF-M
VFF-C
VFF-K
VDC-Y
VDC-M
VDC-C
VDC-K
VG-Y
VG-M
VG-C
VG-K
Remarks
Indicated in round numbers,omitting decimal places.
Description
surface potential (V) of the photosensitive drum
setting (V) of Y at laser output 00
setting (V) of M at laser output 00
setting (V) of C at laser output 00
setting (V) of Bk at laser output FF
setting (V) of Y at laser output FF
setting (V) of M at laser output FF
setting (V) of C at laser output FF
setting (V) of Bk at laser output FF
setting (V) of Y for developing bias DC component
setting (V) of M for developing bias DC component
setting (V) of C for developing bias DC component
setting (V) of Bk for developing bias DC component
setting (V) of Y for grid bias
setting (V) of M for grid bias
setting (V) of C for grid bias
setting (V) of Bk for grid bias
4-27
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>DISPLAY
Level 3
VCONT-Y
VCONT-M
VCONT-C
VCONT-K
VBACK-Y
VBACK-M
VBACK-C
VBACK-K
V00-500
V00-700
VFF-500
VFF-700
DV00-500
DV00-700
DVFF-500
DVFF-700
PFF-Y
PFF-M
PFF-C
PFF-K
Remarks
Indicated in round numbers,omitting decimal places.
Description
setting (V) of Y for target contrast potential
setting (V) of M for target contrast potential
setting (V) of C for target contrast potential
setting (V) of Bk for target contrast potential
setting (V) of de-fogging potential for Y
setting (V) of de-fogging potential for M
setting (V) of de-fogging potential for C
setting (V) of de-fogging potential for Bk
measurement of drum surface potential at laser V00with the primary charging assembly at -500 V
measurement of drum surface potential at laser V00with the primary charging assembly at -700 V
measurement of drum surface potential at laser VFFwith the primary charging assembly at -500 V
measurement of drum surface potential at laser VFFwith the primary charging assembly at -700 V
dark area potential attenuation (V) at laser V00with the drum surface potential at 500 V
dark area potential attenuation (V) at laser V00with the drum surfaced potential at 700 V
dark area potential attenuation (V) at laser VFFwith the drum surfaced potential at 500 V
dark area potential attenuation (V) at laser VFFwith the drum surfaced potential at 700 V
setting of laser pulse width for Y
setting of laser pulse width for M
setting of laser pulse width for C
setting of laser pulse width for Bk
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-28
DENS COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates the concentration of developer.
Level 3
DENS-Y
DENS-M
DENS-C
DENS-K
WINDOW-Y
WINDOW-M
WINDOW-C
WINDOW-K
DMAX-Y
DMAX-M
DMAX-C
DMAX-K
FFRATE-Y
FFRATE-M
FFRATE-C
FFRATE-K
PTOFST-Y
PTOFST-M
PTOFST-C
PTOFST-K
Remarks
Indicates to the seconddecimal place.
Error if lower than 70%
Compares against the designvalue, and omits decimalplaces.
Reference: 100
Uses whole numbers,omitting decimal places
Description
computed value (%) of the developer inside the Ydeveloping assembly
computed value (%) of the developer inside the Mdeveloping assembly
computed value (%) of the developer inside the Cdeveloping assembly
computed value (%) of the developer inside the Bkdeveloping assembly
window soiling correction coefficient for Y
window soiling correction coefficient for M
window soiling correction coefficient for C
window soiling correction coefficient for Bk
solid density (%) of Y during auto gradationcorrection
solid density (%) of M during auto gradationcorrection
solid density (%) of C during auto gradationcorrection
solid density (%) of Bk during auto gradationcorrection
correction value of each used to determine themaximum toner density (FF) while gradationcharacteristics are being controlled for stabilization
offset value of laser strength for Y patch imagedensity adjustment
offset value of laser strength for M patch imagedensity adjustment
offset value of laser strength for C patch imagedensity adjustment
offset value of laser strength for Bk patch imagedensity adjustment
4-29
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>DISPLAY
Level 3
D-Y-TRGT
D-M-TRGT
D-C-TRGT
REF-Y
REF-M
REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C
PT-REF-Y
PT-REF-M
PT-REF-C
PT-REF-K
PT-SIG-Y
PT-SIG-M
PT-SIG-C
PT-SIG-K
PT-SIG-D
PT-REF-D
DMAX70-Y
DMAX70-M
DMAX70-C
DMAX70-K
Remarks
Indicated in round numbers,omitting decimal places
Indicated in round numbers,omitting decimal places.
Description
target value of Y developer concentration
target value of M developer concentration
target value of C developer concentration
present value of the density reference signal for the Ydeveloping assembly (direct light form (LED)
present value of the density reference signal for theM developing assembly (direct light form (LED)
present value of the density reference signal for the Cdeveloping assembly (direct light from LED)
measurement of the present Y developerconcentration
measurement of the present M developerconcentration
measurement of the present C developerconcentration
concentration reference signal for the Y toner on thephotosensitive drum
concentration reference signal for the M toner on thephotosensitive drum
concentration reference signal for the C toner on thephotosensitive drum
concentration reference signal for the Bk toner on thephotosensitive drum
concentration signal for the Y toner on thephotosensitive drum (present value)
concentration signal for the M toner on thephotosensitive drum (present value)
concentration signal for the C toner on thephotosensitive drum (present value)
concentration signal for the Bk toner on thephotosensitive drum (present value)
reflection intensity signal for the photosensitive drumsurface (present value)
reflection intensity reference signal for thephotosensitive drum surface
solid density of Y at laser pulse width 70% duringauto gradation correction
solid density of M at laser pulse width 70% duringauto gradation correction
solid density of C at laser pulse width 70% duringauto gradation correction
solid density of Bk at laser pulse width 70% duringauto gradation correction
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-30
SENSOR COPIER>DISPLAYIndicates the state of sensors of particular importance for servicing work.
Level 3
SC-HP
ITOP-A
ITOP-B
WEB
W-TONER
Remarks
0: HP1: not HP
0: present1: absent
0: case not full1: case is full
Description
output of the original scanner HP sensor (PS1)
output of the side A sensor (PS2)
output of side B sensor (PS3)
cleaning belt is out
case full
0: sensor not detecting signalplate
1: sensor detecting signalplate
4-31
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Projector PRJ>DISPLAY
Level 3
CHANGER
TRAY
T-KIND
T-SET
T-MOVE
T-M-ERR
T-HP-ERR
T-L-MOVE
T-POS
L-MOVE
M-EXCT
L-POS
LAMP-ERR
INITIAL
LOCAL
R/L
Remarks
0: absent, 1: present
0: absent, 1: present
0: 80, 1: 140
0: absent, 1: present
0: stationary, 1: moving
0: normal, 1: error
0: normal, 1: error
0: stationary, 1: moving
0: HP, 1: not HP
1: stationary, 1: moving
0: normal, 1: excited
0: HP, 1: not HP
0: normal, 1: open circuit
0: normal, 1: being initialized
0: normal, 1: moving
0: remote, 1: local
Description
presence/absence of the auto changer
presence/absence of the slide tray
type of tray
presence/absence of slides
state of the tray
tray movement error
tray HP error
tray local movement
position of the tray
lens movement
state of motor excitation
position of the lens
open circuit in the lamp
initialization
local movement
remote/local
Editor EDITOR>DISPLAY
Level 3
ED-X
ED-Y
Remarks
Not indicated ifEDITOR>OPTION>ED-MODE is set to '0'.
Description
input coordinates in editor sub scanning direction (X)
input coordinates in editor main scanning direction(Y)
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-32
C. I/O (I/O display mode)
1. DC-CPU I/O>DC-CON
Address
P001
P002
Remarks
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present (Note)
1: paper present
1: paper present (plainpaper) (Note)
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
Description
buffer path unit jam detection
not used
internal delivery sensor (PS12) signal
external delivery sensor (PS31) signal
separation sensor (PS7) signal
post-transfer paper sensor (PS6) signal
pre-transfer paper sensor (PS5) signal
registration sensor (PS70) signal
pre-registration sensor (PS30) signal
transparency sensor (PS69) signal
multifeeder pickup sensor (PS9) signal
deck pickup sensor (PS101) signal
re-pickup vertical path sensor (PS28) signal
pickup vertical path 1 sensor (PS28) signal
pickup vertical path 2 sensor (PS26) signal
pickup vertical path 3 sensor (PS27) signal
pre-registration sensor (PS30) signal
not used
multifeeder paper sensor (PS15) signal
deck paper absent sensor (PS102) signal
duplexing tray paper sensor (PS36) signal
cassette 1 paper sensor (PS20) signal
cassette 2 paper sensor (PS24/DPS24) signal
cassette 3 paper sensor (PS25/DPS25)
not used
not used
not used
duplexing reversal paper sensor (PS35) signal
duplexing path paper sensor (PS34) signal
duplexing inlet paper sensor (PS37) signal
delivery vertical path 2 sensor (PS33) signal
delivery vertical path 1 sensor (PS32) signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Note: The sensor detects paper after the LED of the sensor turns on; normally, ‘1’ is indicated, since theLED is not ON.
4-33
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P003
P004
Remarks
0: READY
0: READY
0: READY
0: READY
0: READY
0: READY
0: READY
0: connect
0: connect
1: buffer path is present
0: transfer unit is present
0: connected
0: lever is set
0: connected
1: OFF
0: open
1: open
0: open
0: open
0: open
0: open
Description
hopper motor (M10) ready signal
transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8) readysignal
not used
duplexing motor (M14) ready signal
laser scanner motor (M3) ready signal
fixing motor (M5) ready signal
drum motor (M2) ready signal
main motor (M4) ready signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
paper deck connect signal
duplexing unit connect
buffer path unit connect signal
transfer drawer connector connect signal
registration path driver drawer connect signal
transfer drawer connector signal
fixing drawer connector signal
control switch (SW2) off detection
multifeeder tray open/closed sensor (PS62) signal
not used
buffer door switch signal
pickup cover sensor (PS44) signal
left front cover sensor (PS42) signal
right front cover sensor (PS41) signal
delivery cover sensor (PS43) signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-34
Address
P005
P006
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: lower than specified
0: lower than specified
0: lower than specified
0: lower than specified
0: locked
1: full
0: lower than specified
0: belt absent
0: belt absent
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
pickup holder model code 3 signal
pickup holder model code 2 signal
pickup holder model code 1 signal
pickup holder model code 0 signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
cassette 2 paper length sensor 1 (PSU2) signal
cassette 2 paper length sensor 0 (PSU2) signal
cassette 3 paper length sensor 1 (PSU3/DPSU3) signal
cassette 3 paper length sensor (PSU3/DPSU3) signal
not used
Bk toner level sensor (TS4) signal not used
not used
Y toner level sensor (TS3) signal
not used
C toner level sensor (TS2)
not used
M toner level sensor (TS1) signal
waste toner feedscrew locked detecting switch (SW7)signal
waste toner case full sensor (PS68) signal
not used
fixing oil level sensor (PS10) signal
fixing upper cleaning belt length sensor (PS11) signal
fixing lower cleaning belt length sensor (PS67) signal
not used
not used
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I/O>DC-CON
4-35
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Address
P007
P008
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: upper limit
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: error
0: error
1: cassette is present
1: cassette is present
1: cassette is present
Description
multifeeder lifter H sensor (PS17) signal
multifeeder lifter L sensor (PS18) signal
deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS103) signal
not used
not used
cassette 1 lifter sensor (PS19) signal
cassette 2 lifter sensor (PS22/DPS22) signal
cassette 3 lifter sensor (PS23/DPS23) signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
shutoff (SHUTOFF) error detection
SSR2 error detection
not used
not used
not used
not used
counter mode 5 signal
counter mode 4 signal
counter mode 3 signal
counter mode 2 signal
counter mode 1 signal
counter mode 0 signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
cassette 1 sensor (PS46) signal
cassette 2 sensor (PS47/DPS47) signal
cassette 3 sensor (PS48/DPS48) signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I/O>DC-CON
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-36
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P009
P00A
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON (light-blockingplate present)
1: ON (light-blockingplate present)
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: HP
1: error
1: error
0: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
C sensor (PS4) signal
side B sensor (PS3) image leading edge signal
side A sensor (PS2) image leading edge signal
not used
not used
not used
paper jogging guide HP sensor (PS40) signal
attraction/transfer locking cam home position sensor(PS8) signal
transfer drum cleaner HP sensor (PS59) signal
transfer drum HP sensor (PS57) signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Bk developing assembly HP sensor (PS55) signal
Y developing assembly HP sensor (PS53) signal
C developing assembly HP sensor (PS51) signal
M developing assembly HP sensor (PS49) signal
not used
polishing roller motor (M9) error detection
multifeeder lifter motor (M15) error detection
deck lifter motor (M101) error detection
not used
cassette 1 lifter motor (M11) error detection
cassette 2 lifter motor (M12/DM2) error detection
cassette 3 lifter motor (M13/DM13) error detection
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-37
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Note: The sensor detects paper after the LED of the sensor turns on; normally, ‘1’ is indicated, since theLED is not ON.
Address
P00B
P00C
Remarks
1: error
1: OFF
1: error
1: error
0: error
1: HP
1: paper present (Note)
Alternates between 0 and 1.
Alternates between 0 and 1.
Alternates between 0 and 1.
Description
power supply cooling fan (FM9) error detection
not used
24 V off detection (linked to door)
not used
not used
internal static eliminator high voltage error
HVT AC error detection
cleaning blade reciprocating motor (M7) errordetection
buffer path unit locking cam sensor signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71) signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
fixing motor (M5) CLK signal
not used
drum motor (M2) CLK signal (divided by 1/2)
drum motor (M2) CLK signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-38
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P00D
P00E
Remarks
1: HP
0: error if pump is inoperation.
1: error if pump is at rest.
1: open circuit
1: open circuit
1 error
1 error
1 error
1 error
1: error
1: error
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
fixing oil pump driver error detection
not used
fixing upper thermistor open circuit detection
fixing lower thermistor open circuit detection
fixing upper heater error detection
fixing lower heater error detection
SSR1 (fixing upper heater side) error detection
SSR1 (fixing lower heater side) error detection
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
toner suction fan (FM6) error detection
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
delivery cooling fan (FM11) error detection
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
7
3
2
1
0
4-39
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P00F
P010
P011
P012
Remarks
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
Description
not used
not used
hard check output
hard check output
har d check output
hard check output
hard check output
hard check output
hard check output
hard check output
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
pre-exposure lamp (LA1) activation signal
laser scanner motor (M3) clock switch signal
transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8) drivesignal
duplexing motor (M14)
not used
not used
not used
cleaning blade reciprocating motor (M7) drivesignal
laser sensor motor (M3) drive signal
Bk toner supply clutch (CL8) drive signal
Y toner supply clutch (CL7) drive signal
C toner supply clutch (CL6) drive signal
M toner supply clutch (CL5) drive signal
Bk developing cylinder clutch (CL4) drive signal
Y developing cylinder clutch (CL3) drive signal
C developing cylinder clutch (CL2) drive signal
M developing cylinder clutch (CL1) drive signal
bit
15-0
15-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-40
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P013
P014
Remarks
0: during control
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
0: open, 1: closed
0: closed, 1: open
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: forward, 1: reverse
1: forward, 0: reverse
1: ON
1: ON
1: reverse, 0: normaldirection
0: reverse, 1: normal (rollercontact)
Description
control state of the fixing heater
not used
transparency sensor LED (PS69L) ON signal
pre-cleaning paper sensor LED (PS71L) ON signal
fixing upper heater drive signal
fixing lower heater drive signal
fixing oil pump (PSP1) drive signal
SSR2
not used
not used
stopper plate solenoid (SL12) drive signal
stopper plate solenoid (SL12) drive signal
not used
not used
not used
duplexing feeding clutch (CL14) drive signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
Bk toner concentration measurement LED ONsignal
Y toner concentration measurement LED ONsignal
C toner concentration measurement LED ON signal
M toner concentration measurement LED ONsignal
not used
not used
primary charging wire cleaning motor (M6)forward signal
primary charging wire cleaning motor (M6) reversesignal
not used
not used
polishing roller motor (M9) reverse rotation signal
polishing roller motor (M9) normal rotation signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-41
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P015
P016
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: shutoff
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
counter 3 (CNT4) signal
counter 2 (CNT3) signal
counter 1 (CNT2) signal
counter 0 (CNT1) signal
registration jam timing signal
deck sensor select signal 2
deck sensor select signal 1
deck sensor select signal 0
pre-registration jam timing signal
pickup sensor select signal 2
pickup sensor select signal 1
pickup sensor select signal 0
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
A/D multiplex select signal 2
A/D multiplex select signal 1
A/D multiplex select signal 0
not used
not used
fixing upper cleaning belt solenoid (SL1)
fixing lower cleaning belt solenoid (SL2)
delivery vertical path clutch (CL19)
delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL10)
separation claw solenoid (SL4)
shutoff signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-42
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P017
P018
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: full speed, 1: half speed
1: full speed, 0: half speed
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
registration clutch (CL9) drive signal
multifeeder feed clutch (CL10) drive signal
multifeeder pickup clutch (CL16) drive signal
deck pickup clutch (CL102) drive signal
duplexing feed clutch (CL14) drive signal
cassette 1 pickup clutch (CL1) drive signal
cassette 2 pickup clutch (CL12/DCL12) drivesignal
cassette 3 pickup clutch (CL13/DCL13) drivesignal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
toner suction fan (FM6) drive signal 1
toner suction fan (FM6) drive signal 0
laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4) drive signal
not used
not used
not used
delivery cooling fan (FM11) drive signal 1
delivery cooling fan (FM11) drive signal 0
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-43
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P019
P01A
Remarks
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
0: select
0: select
0: select
0: select
1: accelerate, 0: 0 µ
0: accelerate, 1: 0 µ
0: remote
1: accelerate, 0: 0 µ
0: accelerate, 1: 0 µ
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
0: ENABLE
0: ENABLE
0: ENABLE
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
0: remote
1: down
1: up
0: ON
1: down
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
Description
No. 3/No. 4 DC remote signal
No. 3/No. 4 WBP remote signal
No. 1/No. 2 DC remote signal
No. 1/No. 2 WBP remote signal
DC output select 4 signal
DC output select 3 signal
DC output select 2 signal
DC output select 1 signal
transfer acceleration remote signal
trainer 0 µ remote signal
transfer DC remote signal
attraction acceleration remote signal
attraction 0 µ remote signal
attraction DC remote signal
grid remote signal
primary DC remote signal
HV-DEV-ENABLE signal
HV-DC-ENABLE signal
HV-AC-ENABLE signal
post-cleaning charging DC remote signal
separation DC remote signal
separation AC remote signal
internal static eliminator DC remote signal
internal static eliminator AC remote signal
not used
multifeeder lifter motor (M15) reverse drive signal
multifeeder lifter motor (M15) normal rotationdrive signal
deck lifter motor (M101) drive signal
deck lifter down signal
cassette 1 lifter motor (M11) drive signal
cassette 2 lifter motor (M12/DM12) drive signal
cassette 3 lifter motor (M13/DM13) drive signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-44
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P01B
P01C
Remarks
0: open
0: set
1: open
0: paper present
0: paper present
0: deck present
0: lower limit
1: reverse (stirring)
0: ON
1: low speed
0: normal
0: ON
0 : ON
1: low speed
0: low speed, 1: BD sync
1: normal rotation
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
Description
deck open sensor (PS109) signal
deck set sensor (PS105) signal
deck open switch (SW101) signal
deck stack level upper sensor (PS107) signal
deck paper level lower sensor (PS108) signal
deck detection signal
deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102)signal
not used
not used
not used
hopper motor (M10) reverse rotation drive signal
hopper motor (M10) drive signal
fixing motor (M5) speed signal 1
fixing motor (M5) speed signal 0
not used
fixing motor (M5) driver signal
not used
not used
main motor reversal signal
main motor (M4) drive signal
drum motor (M2) speed signal 1
drum motor (M2) speed signal 0
drum motor (M2) reversal signal
drum motor (M2) drive signal
deck open indication (LED100) ON signal
deck open solenoid (SL102) drive signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
postcard feeding clutch (CL18) drive signal
registration roller releasing solenoid (SL5) drivesignal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-45
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P01D
P01E
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
-
0: left side when viewedfrom rear
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
1: full speed, 0: half speed
0: full speed, 1: half speed
1: full speed, 0: half speed
0: full speed, 1: half speed
1: full speed, 0: half speed
0: full speed, 1: half speed
Description
not used
not used
multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL14) drive signal
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL101) drivesignal
duplexing paper feed roller solenoid (SL13) drivesignal
pickup roller 1 solenoid (SL7)
pickup roller 2 solenoid (SL8/DSL8)
pickup roller 3 solenoid (SL9/DSL9)
buffer path unit solenoid (SL1) drive signal
buffer path unit clutch (CL1) drive signal
buffer path unit solenoid (SL2) drive signal
buffer path unit cam HP select signal
duplexing stacking guide plate solenoid (SL15)drive signal
not used
attraction roller solenoid (SL6) drive signal
separation push-up solenoid (SL3) drive signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
back suction fan (FM16) drive signal 1
back suction fan (FM16) drive signal 0
exhaust fan (FM2) full speed drive signal
exhaust fan (FM2) half speed drive signal
IP cooling fan (FM7) full speed drive signal
IP cooling fan (FM7) half speed drive signal
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-46
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P01F
P020
Remarks
1: ON
1: full speed, 0: half speed
1: half speed, 0: full speed
1: ON
1: full speed, 0: half speed
1: full speed, 0: half speed
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
ozone suction fan (FM5) drive signal
not used
primary charging assembly fan (FM3) full speeddrive signal
primary charging assembly fan (FM3) half speeddrive signal
laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4) drive signal
not used
electrical unit cooling fan (FM8) full speed drivesignal
electrical unit cooling fan (FM8) half speed drivesignal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
ozone suction fan (FM5) error detection
primary charging assembly fan (FM3) errordetection
laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4) errordetection
electrical unit cooling fan (FM8) error detection
not used
back suction fan (FM16) error direction
exhaust fan (FM2) error detection
IP cooling fan (FM7) error detection
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-47
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>DC-CON
Address
P021
P022
P023
P024
P025
P026
P027
P028
Remarks
1: download mode
1: OFF
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
LD-J2DCON
power switch off signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-0
15-0
15-0
15-0
15-0
15-0
15-0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-48
2. R-CPU I/O>R-CON
Address
P001
P002
P003
Remarks
1: request
1: RESET
1: ON
1: half speed, 0: full speed
1: full speed, 0: half speed
1: RESET
1: ON
1: ACK
0: connect
1: error
0: side B image leading edge
0: side B image leading edge
0: connect
Description
not used
not used
not used
WATCH DOG pulse signal
ECO PCB internal signal
ECO PCB internal signal
ECO PCB internal signal
R-CON to DC-CON power ready signal
R-CON to PANEL-CON power ready signal
not used
digitizer request signal
CVR time rest signal
scanning lamp (LA2) ON signal
not used
original exposure system cooling fan 1 (FM1) halfspeed drive signal
original exposure system cooling fan 1 (FM1) fullspeed drive signal
original scanner motor driver RESET signal
projector SSR-ON signal
not used
digitizer ACK signal
digitizer connect signal
original exposure system cooling fan (FM1) errordetected
READER-ITOP-B input signal
READER-ITOP-A input signal
CC-V connect signal
DC-CON to R-CON power ready signal
PANEL-CON to R-CON power ready signal
bit
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-49
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
I/O>R-CON
Address
P004
P005
P006
Remarks
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: ON
0: error
Description
not used
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
not used
RS-232C input signal
scanner IPC error 3
scanner IPC error 2
scanner IPC error 1
scanning lamp (LA2) ON detection signal
CVR error detection
internal signal
internal signal
not used
RS-232C output signal
internal signal
not used
not used
not used
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
bit
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-50
I/O>R-CON
Address
P007
P008
P009
Remarks
1: half speed
1: full speed
1: count increase
1: count increase
0: ON
download mode
1: error
1: error
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
original exposure system cooling fan 2 (FM14)half speed drive signal
original exposure system cooling fan 2 (FM14)full speed signal
CC-X count signal
CC-V count signal
not used
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
internal signal
control switch (SW2) detection signal
not used
internal signal
download mode signal
not used
for factory adjustment
not used
not used
for factory adjustment
original exposure system cooling fan 3 (FM15)error detection
original exposure system cooling fan 2 (FM14)error detection
PCB check mode 1
PCB check mode 0
bit
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4-51
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
D. ADJUST (adjustment mode)
COPIER>ADJUST ItemsLevel 1
ADJUST
Level 2
ADJ-XY
CCD
LASER
Level 3
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
ADJ-S
ADJ-J
EC-BEC-GEC-R
T-V00
T-VFF
P3-V00
P3-VFF-1
P3-VFF-2
P3-VFF-3
P3-VFF-4
POWER
T-V00-ON
T-VFF-ON
P3V00-ON
P3-V1-ON
P3-V2-ON
P3-V3-ON
P3-V4-ON
Description
adjusts the image read start position (Xdirection; units of 0.1 mm)adjusts the image read start position (Ydirection; in units of 0.1 mm)adjusts measurement position for shadingcorrection from the standard white plate (inunits of 0.1 mm)adjusts the period of acceleration for theoriginal scanner motor
for future expansionfor future expansionfor future expansion
enters the laser control initial value at V00for text mode (800 lines) as for laser unitreplacemententers the laser control initial value at VFFfor text mode (800 lines) as for laser unitreplacemententers the laser control initial value at V00for photo mode (400 lines) as for laser unitreplacemententers the laser control initial value at VFF(45%) for photo mode (400 lines) as forlaser unit replacemententers the laser control initial value at VFF(55 %) for photo mode (400 lines) as forlaser unit replacemententers the laser control initial value at VFF(65%) for photo mode (400 lines) as forlaser unit replacemententers the laser control initial value at VFF(70%) for photo mode (400 lines) as forlaser unit replacementturns on the laser output for laser poweradjustment (OK key to start, Stop key tostop)turns on the laser output for a check on T-V00 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on T-VFF (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on P3-V00 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on P3-VFF-1 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on P3-VFF-2 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on P3-VFF-3 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)turns on the laser output for a check on P3-VFF-4 (OK key to start, Stop key to stop)
Settings
-200 to +200
-100 to +100
0 to 32
0 to 500
---------
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-52
DENS SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C
REF-Y
REF-M
REF-C
SIGG-Y
SIGG-M
SIGG-C
RGAIN-K
D-Y-TRGT
D-M-TRGT
D-C-TRGT
PTOFST-Y
PTOFST-M
PTOFST-C
PTOFST-K
D-REF-Y
D-REF-M
D-REF-C
D-REF-K
D-REF-4
concentration signal of Y toner during INITfor ATR controlconcentration signal of M toner during INITfor ATR controlconcentration signal of C toner during INITfor ATR controlconcentration reference signal of Y tonerduring INIT for ATR controlconcentration reference signal of M tonerduring INIT for ATR controlconcentration reference signal of C tonerduring INIT for ATR controlgain for concentration reference signal of Ytoner during ATR controlgain for concentration reference signal of Mtoner during ATR controlgain for concentration reference signal of Ctoner during ATR controlgain for concentration reference signal of Bktoner during toner concentration controlpresent value of the concentration target ofY toner during ART controlpresent value of the concentration target ofM toner during ART controlpresent value of the concentration target of Ctoner during ART controlcorrection value (%) for the laser output ofY toner during ART controlcorrection value (%) for the laser output ofM toner during ART controlcorrection value (%) for the laser output of Ctoner during ART controlcorrection value (%) for the laser output ofBk toner during ART controlreference signal value for the concentrationsensor of Y toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of M toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of C toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of Bk toner in relation to thereflection intensity of light from thephotosensitive drum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of all toners in relation to thereflection intensity of light from thephotosensitive drum (upon initialization)
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
4-53
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
D-SGNL-Y
D-SGNL-M
D-SGNL-C
D-SGNL-K
D-SGNL-4
P-REF-Y
P-REF-M
P-REF-C
P-REF-K
P-SGNL-Y
P-SGNL-M
P-SGNL-C
P-SGNL-K
SIGG-K
SIGG-P-Y
SIGG-P-M
SIGG-P-C
SIGG-P-K
RGAN-P-Y
RGAN-P-M
RGAN-P-C
reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of Y toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of M toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of C toner in relation to the reflectionintensity of light from the photosensitivedrum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of Bk toner in relation to thereflection intensity of light from thephotosensitive drum (upon initialization)reference signal value for the concentrationsensor of all toners in relation to thereflection intensity of light from thephotosensitive drum (upon initialization)reference signal value of Y toner on thephotosensitive drum during INIT for ATRcontrolreference signal value of M toner on thephotosensitive drum during INIT for ATRcontrolreference signal value of C toner on thephotosensitive drum during INIT for ATRcontrolreference signal value of Bk toner on thephotosensitive drum during INIT for ATRcontrolsignal value of Y toner on the photosensitivedrum during INIT for ATR controlsignal value of M toner on the photosensitivedrum during INIT for ATR controlsignal value of C toner on the photosensitivedrum during INIT for ATR controlsignal value of Bk toner on thephotosensitive drum during INIT for ATRcontrolgain for concentration reference signal of Bktoner during ATR controlcorrection of the patch data gain for ATRcontrol when INIT-Y is executedcorrection of the patch data gain for ATRcontrol when INIT-M is executedcorrection of the patch data gain for ATRcontrol when INIT-C is executedcorrection of the patch data gain for ATRcontrol when INIT-K is executedcorrection of the patch gain for toner densitycontrol when INIT-Y is executedcorrection of the patch gain for toner densitycontrol when INIT-M is executedcorrection of the patch gain for toner densitycontrol when INIT-C is executed
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-54
V-CONT
PASCAL
COLOR
RGAN-P-K
VBACK-Y
VBACK-M
VBACK-C
VBACK-K
EPOTOFSTRF-CRT-Y
PF-CRT-M
PF-CRT-C
PF-CRT-K
OFST-P-Y
OFST-P-M
OFST-P-C
OFST-P-K
ADJ-Y
ADJ-M
ADJ-C
ADJ-K
OFST-Y
OFST-M
OFST-C
OFST-K
P-ADJ-Y
P-ADJ-M
P-ADJ-C
P-ADJ-K
P-OFST-Y
correction of the patch gain for toner densitycontrol when INIT-K is executed
Y color adjustment for de-fogging potential(reference: 0)M color adjustment for de-fogging potential(reference: 0)C color adjustment for de-fogging potential(reference: 0)Bk color adjustment for de-fogging potential(reference: 0)potential offset value (reference: 0)offset value adjustment (%) for Y laserstrengthoffset value adjustment (%) for M laserstrengthoffset value adjustment (%) for C laserstrengthoffset value adjustment (%) for Bk laserstrength
target value setting of Y for high-densityareas during auto gradation correctiontarget value setting of M for high-densityareas during auto gradation correctiontarget value setting of C for high-densityareas during auto gradation correctiontarget value setting of Bk for high-densityareas during auto gradation correction
color balance adjustment of Y for the user(reference: 0)color balance adjustment of M for the user(reference: 0)color balance adjustment of C for the user(reference: 0)color balance adjustment of Bk for the user(reference: 0)color balance adjustment and density of Ylight areascolor balance adjustment and density of Mlight areascolor balance adjustment and density of Clight areascolor balance adjustment and density of Bklight areascolor balance adjustment of Y for outputfrom an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of M for outputfrom an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of C for outputfrom an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of Bk for outputfrom an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of Y light areas foroutput from an external image controller
0 to 255
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
0 to 1023-25 to +25
-25 to +25
-25 to +25
-25 to +25
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
-127 to +128
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-16 to +16
-16 to +16
-16 to +16
-16 to +16
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-8 to +8
-16 to +16
4-55
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-TR
P-OFST-M
P-OFST-C
P-OFST-K
HV-TR
TR-L1
TR-L2
TR-N1
TR-N2
TR-T1
TR-T2
TR-UT1
TR-UT2
TR-S1-1
TR-S2-1
TR-OHP
TR-POST
color balance adjustment of M light areasfor output from an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of C light areasfor output from an external image controllercolor balance adjustment of Bk light areasfor output from an external image controller
adjustment of transfer high-voltage output
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for special paper 1, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for special paper 2, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for transparencies, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)for postcards, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)
-16 to +16
-16 to +16
-16 to +16
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-56
TR-L1
TR-L2
TR-N1
TR-N2
TR-T1
TR-T2
TR-UT1
TR-UT2
TR-S1-1
TR-S2-1
TR-OHP
TR-POST
Environment B (B-ZONE)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for special paper 1, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for special paper 2, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for transparencies, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)for postcards, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Cont'd Cont'd
4-57
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
TR-L1
TR-L2
TR-N1
TR-N2
TR-T1
TR-T2
TR-UT1
TR-UT2
TR-S1-1
TR-S2-1
TR-OHP
TR-POST
Environment C (C-ZONE)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thin paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for extra thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of µA)for special paper 1, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for special paper 2, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of µA)for transparencies, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)for postcards, transfer charging biasadjustment (in units of µA)
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-58
HV-SP HV-SP
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
adjustment of separation DC high-voltageoutput (in units of 50 µA)
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for transparencies, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)for postcards, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
Cont'd Cont'd
4-59
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for transparencies, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)for postcards, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-60
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
Environment C (C-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thin paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for thick paper, transfer charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 50 µA)for transparencies, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)for postcards, separation charging biasadjustment (in units of 50 µA)
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
-6 to 0
Cont'd Cont'd
4-61
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
SP-ON-N1
SP-ON-N2
SP-ON-L1
SP-ON-L2
SP-ON-T1
SP-ON-T2
SP-ONUT1
SP-ONUT2
SP-ON-S1
SP-ON-S2
SP-ONOHP
SP-ON-PT
for plain paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side ofa double-sided copy (in units of 50 µA)for plain paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for copyingon the 2nd side of a double-sided copyfor thin paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side ofa double-sided copy)for thin paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for copyingon the 2nd side of a double-sided copyfor thick paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for single-sided copying or copying on the 1st side ofa double-sided copyfor thick paper, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for copyingon the 2nd side of a double-sided copyfor extra thick paper, separation re-chargingON environment adjustment value forsingle-sided copying or copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copyfor extra thick paper, separation re-chargingON environment adjustment value forcopying on the 2nd side of a double-sidedcopyfor special paper 1, separation re-chargingON environment adjustment value forsingle-sided copying or copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copyfor special paper 2, separation re-chargingON environment adjustment value forsingle-sided copying or copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copyfor transparencies, separation re-chargingON environment adjustment valuefor postcards, separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 32
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-62
HV-IEL
IEL-L1
IEL-L2
IEL-N1
IEL-N2
IEL-T1
IEL-T2
IEL-UT1
IEL-UT2
IEL-S1-1
IEL-S2-1
IEL-OHP
IEL-POST
internal static eliminator high-voltageoutput adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for single-sidedcopying or copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for copying onthe 2nd side of a double-sided copy (in unitsof 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, internal static eliminator biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
Cont'd Cont'd
HV-IEL
4-63
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
IEL-L1
IEL-L2
IEL-N1
IEL-N2
IEL-T1
IEL-T2
IEL-UT1
IEL-UT2
IEL-S1-1
IEL-S2-1
IEL-OHP
IEL-POST
Environment B (B-ZONE)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for single-sidedcopying or copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for copying onthe 2nd side of a double-sided copy (in unitsof 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, internal static eliminator biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-64
IEL-L1
IEL-L2
IEL-N1
IEL-N2
IEL-T1
IEL-T2
IEL-UT1
IEL-UT2
IEL-S1-1
IEL-S2-1
IEL-OHP
IEL-POST
Environment C (C-ZONE)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, internal static eliminator biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for single-sidedcopying or copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, internal staticeliminator bias adjustment for copying onthe 2nd side of a double-sided copy (in unitsof 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, internal static eliminatorbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, internal static eliminator biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
-8 to 0
Cont'd
4-65
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-ATT HV-ATT
ATT-L1
ATT-L2
ATT-N1
ATT-N2
ATT-T1
ATT-T2
ATT-UT1
ATT-UT2
ATT-S1
ATT-S2
ATT-OHP
ATT-POST
attraction high-voltage output adjustment(in units of 2 µA)
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for special paper 1, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for special paper 2, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for transparencies, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment (in units of 2 µA)for postcards, attraction high-voltage outputadjustment (in units of 2 µA)
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-66
ATT-L1
ATT-L2
ATT-N1
ATT-N2
ATT-T1
ATT-T2
ATT-UT1
ATT-UT2
ATT-S1
ATT-S2
ATT-OHP
ATT-POST
Environment B (B-ZONE)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for special paper 1, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for special paper 2, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for transparencies, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment (in units of 2 µA)for postcards, attraction high-voltage outputadjustment (in units of 2 µA)
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
Cont'd Cont'd
4-67
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
ATT-L1
ATT-L2
ATT-N1
ATT-N2
ATT-T1
ATT-T2
ATT-UT1
ATT-UT2
ATT-S1
ATT-S2
ATT-OHP
ATT-POST
Environment C (C-ZONE)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thin paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for plain paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for extra thick paper, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (in units of 2µA)for special paper 1, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for special paper 2, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment for single-sided copyingor copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 2 µA)for transparencies, attraction high-voltageoutput adjustment (in units of 2 µA)for postcards, attraction high-voltage outputadjustment (in units of 2 µA)
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
-5 to +5
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-68
DOC-REC
FEED-ADJ
DX-XSDA-XEDA-YSDA-YEDS-DOC
ATT-T-A
ATT-T-B
RG-XA
RG-XB
RG-Y
TR-DLY-A
TR-DLY-B
ATT-CHK
ATT-ON
RGST-CHK
RGST-ON
TR1-CHK
TR2-CHK
TR1-ON
TR2-ON
TR-END-A
TR-END-B
fine-adjustment of the original detection areafine-adjustment of the original detection areafine-adjustment of the original detection areafine-adjustment of the original detection areaadjustment of the slice level for originaldetection
adjustment of side A attraction timing for thetransfer drumadjustment of side B attraction timing for thetransfer drumadjustment of registration in sub scanningdirection of side A on the transfer drumadjustment of registration in sub scanningdirection of side B on the transfer drumadjustment of registration in main scanningdirection on the transfer drumUse it to adjust the transfer delay on side A ofthe transfer drum.Use it to adjust the transfer delay on side B ofthe transfer drum.specification of position of attraction on thetransfer drum during ATT-ON (1: 2-sheetretention of sides B and A; 2: retention onside A, 3: retention on side B)executes attraction of copy paper to thetransfer drum according to ATTCHK (OKkey to start; auto stop)specifies position of attraction on the transferdrum during RGST-ON (1: 2-sheet retentionon sides B and A, 2: retention on side A, 3:retention on side B)executes printing for checking registration(retention side) using C according to RGST-CHK (OK key to start; auto stop)specifies position of attraction on the transferdrum during TR1-ON (1: 2-sheet retention ofsides B and A, 2: retention on side A, 3:retention on side B)specifies position of attraction on the transferdrum during TR2-ON (1: 2-sheet retention ofsides B and A, 2: retention on side A, 3:retention on side B)executes printing for checking the leadingedge margin (1 mm) according to TR1-CHK(OK key to start; auto stop)executes printing for checking the leadingedge margin (8 mm) according to TR2-CHK(OK key to start; auto stop)adjusts the falling edge (trailing edge margin)of transfer high voltage for side A retentionadjusts the falling edge (trailing edge margin)of transfer high voltage for side B retention
-99 to +99-99 to +99-99 to +99-99 to +990 to 31
-10 to +10
-10 to +10
-47 to +47
-47 to +47
-70 to +70
-10 to +10
-10 to +10
1 to 3
---
1 to 3
---
1 to 3
1 to 3
---
---
0 to 25
0 to 25
Cont'd
4-69
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
CST-ADJ
MISC
C2-STMTR
C2-A4R
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
C1-LVOL
C1-HVOL
C2-LVOL
C2-HVOL
C3-LVOL
C3-HVOL
SEG-ADJ
K-ADJATT-RTN1
ATT-RTN2
ATT-RTN3
ATT-RTN4
BC-ADJ
ACS-ADJ
paper width basic value adjustment forSTMTR in cassette 2paper width basic value adjustment for A4Rin cassette 2paper width basic value adjustment forSTMTR in cassette 3paper width basic value adjustment for A4Rin cassette 3paper width basic value adjustment for A4Rin the multifeederpaper width basic value adjustment for A6Rin the multifeederpaper width basic value adjustment for A4 inthe multifeederslice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 1 (for 50 sheets)slice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 1 (for 275 sheets)slice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 2 (for 50 sheets)slice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 2 (for 275 sheets)slice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 3 (for 50 sheets)slice level input for the paper level detectingVR for cassette 3 (for 275 sheets)
separation level adjustment between text andphoto in text/photo mode or text/silver halidemode
for plain paper, addition of a rotation forattraction rotation for signal-sided copyingand copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (full color)for plain paper, addition of a rotation forattraction rotation for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (full color)for thin paper, addition of a rotation forattraction rotation for signal-sided copyingand copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (full color)for thin paper, addition of a rotation forattraction rotation for copying on the 2ndside of a double-sided copy (full color)adjustment of color identification range fornon-pattern processingadjustment of color recognition sensitivityfor ACS
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
-3 to +3
-3 to +30 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
-3 to +3
0 to 1
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-70
SENS-ADJ
HV-SP-AC
CLN-TH
CLN-TMP
HV-SP
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
input of thermal correction for the pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71; in units ofmV)input of a thermal correction value for thepre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71; in unitsof °C)
separation AC high-voltage output (in unitsof 0.5 kV)
Environment A (A-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units 0.5 kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, separation charging ACbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, separation charging AC biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
2300 to 5500
0 to 60
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Cont'd Cont'd
4-71
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
Environment B (B-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units 0.5 kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, separation charging ACbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, separation charging AC biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-72
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
HV-PSTCL
Environment C (C-ZONE)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for thin paper, separation charging AC biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for plain paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units 0.5 kV)for thick paper, separation charging biasadjustment for copying on the 2nd side of adouble-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for extra thick paper, separation chargingbias adjustment for copying on the 2nd sideof a double-sided copy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 1, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for special paper 2, separation charging biasadjustment for single-sided copying orcopying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy (in units of 0.5 kV)for transparencies, separation charging ACbias adjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)for postcards, separation charging AC biasadjustment (in units of 0.5 kV)
adjusting the post-cleaning high-voltageoutput (in units of 20 µA)
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
-6 to +6HV-PSTCL
4-73
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
FEEDER>ADJUST Items
Level 1
ADJUST
Level 2 Level 3
ADJ-RX
ADJ-RY
ADJ-DX
ADJ-DY
Description
adjustment of registration in sub scanningdirection with the multifeeder in use (in unitsof 0.1 mm)adjustment of registration in main scanningdirection with the multifeeder in use (in unitsof 0.1 mm)adjustment of registration in sub scanningdirection with the multifeeder in use inmanual feed mode (in units of 0.1 mm)adjustment of registration in main scanningdirection with the multifeeder in use inmanual feed mode (in units of 0.1 mm)
Settings
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
PRJ>ADJUST Items
Level 1
ADJUST
Level 2 Level 3
DS-PRJ
DS-OHP
RD-XS
RD-XE
RD-YS
RD-YE
DA-XS
DA-XE
DA-YS
DA-YE
Description
adjustment of the slice level for theprojection area with the projector in useadjustment of the slice level for originaldetection from the reference sheet positionof film with the projector in useadjustment of the read area with originaldetection OFF and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection OFF and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection OFF and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection OFF and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection ON and with the projector in use(in units of 0.11 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection ON and with the projector in use(in units of 0.11 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection ON and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of the read area with originaldetection ON and with the projector in use(in units of 0.06 mm; standard: 0)
Settings
0 to 31
0 to 31
-300 to +300
-300 to +300
-300 to +300
-300 to +300
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-74
NEGA-B
NAGA-G
NEGA-R
POSI-B
POSI-G
POSI-R
N-LMT
N-G-LMT
P-LMT
P-G-LMT
OHP-LMT
P-DA-XS
P-DA-XE
P-DA-YS
P-DA-YE
N-DA-XS
adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying negative film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensY area)adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying negative film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensM area)adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying negative film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensC area)adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying positive film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensY area)adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying positive film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensM area)adjustment of the target value for shadingcorrection when copying positive film withthe projector in use (a higher setting darkensC area)change of the limit for the projector lamp innegative normal mode with the projector inusechange of the limit for the projector lamp innegative normal mode with the projector inusechange of the limit for the projector lamp inpositive normal mode with the projector inusechange of the limit for the projector lamp inpositive normal mode with the projector inusechange of the limit for the projector lamp intransparency mode with the projector in useadjustment of frame erasing width forpositive film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 24)adjustment of frame erasing width forpositive film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 8)adjustment of frame erasing width forpositive film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 32)adjustment of frame erasing width forpositive film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 24)adjustment of frame erasing width fornegative film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 50)
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
4-75
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
N-DA-XE
N-DA-YS
N-DA-YE
O-DA-XS
O-DA-XE
O-DA-YS
O-DA-YE
CHNGR-X
CHNGR-Y
adjustment of frame erasing width fornegative film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 50)adjustment of frame erasing width fornegative film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 50)adjustment of frame erasing width fornegative film with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 50)adjustment of frame erasing width fortransparencies with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 24)adjustment of frame erasing width fortransparencies with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 8)adjustment of frame erasing width fortransparencies with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 32)adjustment of frame erasing width fortransparencies with the projector in use (inunits of 0.6 mm; standard: 24)adjustment of position in main scanningdirection with the rotary changer of theprojector in use (in units of 0.6 mm;standard: 0)adjustment of position in sub scanningdirection with the rotary changer of theprojector in use (in units of 0.6 mm;standard: 0)
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
EDITOR>ADJUST Items
Level 1
ADJUST
Level 2 Level 3
ED-X
ED-Y
LOOP-MB
LOOP-TH
MRK-MB
MRK-TH
Description
adjustment of input coordinates in editor subscanning (X) direction (in units of about 0.13mm; standard: 0)adjustment of input coordinates in editormain scanning (Y) direction (in units ofabout 0.13 mm; standard: 0)adjustment of processing used when readingimages into memory for coloring in areaselect/color create mode (standard: 0; ahigher setting makes filling of gaps easier)adjustment of the binary slice level usedwhen reading images into memory forcoloring in area select/color create mode(standard: 192; a higher setting enablesreading of fine lines)adjustment of processing used when readingimages into memory for marking/pointing(standard: 0; a higher setting makes filling ofgaps easier)adjustment of the binary slice level usedwhen reading images into memory formarking/pointing (standard: 128; a highersetting enables reading of fine lines)
Settings
-99 to +99
-99 to +99
0 to 3
0 to 255
0 to 3
0 to 255
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-76
ADJ-XY COPIER>ADJUSTIndicates the image read start position.
Level 3
ADJ-X(Note 1)
ADJ-Y(Note 1)
Remarks
-200 to +200(-3.9 to +3.9 mm)Unit: about 0.107 mm
-100 to +100(-2.5 to +2.5 mm)Unit: about 0.06 mm
Description
Use it to make adjustments so that the image readposition matches the reference point on thecopyboard glass.Fine-adjusts the distance between the originalscanner HP sensor to the read start position.• Unit: number of steps from the stepping motor• Make adjustments as shown in the next page.
Fine-adjusts the CCD reading start position.• Unit: pixels• Make adjustments as shown in the next page.
Vertical size plate
CCD
Horizontal size late
4-77
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Level 3
ADJ-S(Note 1)
ADJ-J(Note 1)
Remarks
0 to 45(0 to 4.8 mm)Unit: about 0.107 mm
0 to +190Unit: about 0.1 msec
Description
Use it to fine-adjust the position at which data iscollected for shading correction from the standardwhite plate.• Unit: number of steps from the stepping motor• Scratches or dirt on the standard plate can cause
vertical white lines on copies. To correct theproblem, shift the point of measurement using thisitem.
Use it to adjust the period of acceleration for theoriginal scanner motor.
(front)
Point of measurement
Standard white plate
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settings willbe returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
Adjusting the Image Read Start PositionBe sure to check the present point of attraction before starting the work.
1) Turn off the original detection mechanism before starting service mode.2) Bring up the ADJ-XY screen, and press the Copy Start key.
• Appropriate copying mode will automatically be set, and a copy is made with a shift ofabout 50 mm as shown.
3) If any part of the image is missing, decrease the setting of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y.4) If an area outside the image is copied, increase the setting of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y.
Figure 4-11
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-78
LASERAdjusts the laser system.
Level 3
T-V00
T-VFF
P3-V00
P3-VFF-1
P3-VFF-2
P3-VFF-3
P3-VFF-4
POWER
T-V00-ON
T-VFF-ON
P3V00-ON
P3-V1-ON
P3-V2-ON
P3-V3-ON
P3-V4-ON
Remarks
0 to 255
Press the OK key to start andthe Stop key to stop.
Description
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at V00for text mode (800 lines) as upon replacement of thelaser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFFfor text mode (800 lines) as upon replacement of thelaser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at V00for photo mode (400 lines) as upon replacement ofthe laser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFF(45%) for photo mode (400 lines) as uponreplacement of the laser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFF(55%) for photo mode (400 lines) as uponreplacement of the laser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFF(65%) for photo mode (400 lines) as uponreplacement of the laser unit.
Use it to enter the laser control initial value at VFF(70%) for photo mode (400 lines) as uponreplacement of the laser unit.
Use it to turn on the laser output when adjusting thelaser power.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking T-V00.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking T-VFF.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-V00.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-1.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-2.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-3.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-4.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
CCD COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the CCD
Level 3
EC-BEC-GEC-R
RemarksDescription
For future expansion.
4-79
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
DENS COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts items related to developer concentration.
Level 3
SGNL-YSGNL-MSGNL-C(Note 1)
REF-YREF-MREF-C(Note 1)
SIGG-YSIGG-MSIGG-C(Note 1)
RGAIN-K(Note 1)
D-Y-TRGTD-M-TRGTD-C-TRGT(Note 1)
PTOFST-YPTOFST-MPTOFST-CPTOFST-K(Note 1)
D-REF-YD-REF-MD-REF-CD-REF-K
D-REF-4(Note 1)
Remarks
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 1023
-127 to +128
0 to 1023
Description
Use it to adjust the toner concentration signal valueof each color during INIT for ATR control.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration referencesignal value for each color during INIT for ATRcontrol.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration referencesignal gain value for each color during ATR control.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration referencesignal gain value for Bk during toner concentrationcontrol.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration target presentvalue of each color during ATR control.
Use it to adjust the correction value (%) of the laseroutput of each color during ATR control.
Use it to adjust the reference signal value (duringinitialization) of each toner concentration sensor inrelation to light reflected by the photosensitivedrum.
Use it to adjust the reference signal value (duringinitialization) of the toner concentration sensor forall colors in relation to light reflected by thephotosensitive drum.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-80
Level 3
D-SGNL-YD-SGNL-MD-SGNL-CD-SGNL-K
D-SGNL-4(Note 1)
P-REF-YP-REF-MP-REF-CP-REF-K(Note 1)
P-SGNL-YP-SGNL-MP-SGNL-CP-SGNL-K(Note 1)
SIGG-K(Note 1)
SIGG-P-MSIGG-P-CSIGG-P-YSIGG-P-K(Note 1)
RGAN-P-MRGAN-P-CRGAN-P-YRGAN-P-K(Note 1)
Remarks
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Description
Use it to adjust the signal value (duringinitialization) for the toner concentration sensor ofeach color in relation to light reflected by thephotosensitive drum.
Use it to adjust the signal value (duringinitialization) for the toner concentration sensor ofall colors in relation to light reflected by thephotosensitive drum.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration referencesignal value for each color on the photosensitivedrum during INIT for ATR control.
Use it to adjust the toner concentration referencesignal value for each color on the photosensitivedrum during INIT for ATR control.
Use it to adjust the gain for the Bk tonerconcentration reference signal during ATR control.
correction of the patch gain for ATR control whenINIT-x (mono INIT) is executed
correction of the patch gain for toner density controlwhen INIT-x (mono INIT) is executed
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-81
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
V-CONT COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the photosensitive drum surface potential contrast.
Level 3
VBACK-YVBACK-MVBACK-CVBACK-K
EPOTOFST
PF-CRT-YPF-CRT-MPF-CRT-CPF-CRT-K
Remarks
-4 to +4Standard: 0+ side: darkens- side: lightens
0 to 1023Standard: 0
-25 to +25
Description
Use it to adjust the de-fogging potential for eachcolor.
Use it to adjust the potential offset value.
Use it to adjust the offset value (%) of laser strengthfor each color.
PASCALAdjusts automatic gradation correction.
Level 3
OFST-P-YOFST-P-MOFST-P-COFST-P-K
Remarks
-127 to +128
Description
Use it to adjust the target value of each color inhigh-density areas during auto gradation correction.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-82
COLOR COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the color balance.
Level 3
ADJ-YADJ-MADJ-CADJ-K(Note 1)
OFST-YOFST-MOFST-COFST-K(Note 1)
P-ADJ-YP-ADJ-MP-ADJ-CP-ADJ-K(Note 1)
P-OFST-YP-OFST-MP-OFST-CP-OFST-K(Note 1)
Remarks
-8 to +8Standard:M=0, C=0, Y=0, K=0+ side: darkens- side: lightens
-16 to +16Standard:M=0, C=0, Y=0, K=0
-8 to +8Standard:M=0, C=0, Y=0, K=0+ side: darkens- side: lightens
-16 to +16StandardM=0, C=0, Y=0, K=0
Description
Use it to correct the color balance of each colorselected by the user.• Be sure to set the user color balance to '0' before
using this item.• Be sure to follow the Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure.
Use it to adjust the color balance and density of lightareas of each color.• Be sure to follow the Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure.• To increase the degree of reproduction of
extremely light areas, decrease the setting.
Use it to correct the color balance of each colorwhen output is from an external image controller.• Be sure to set the user color balance to '0' before
using this mode.• Be sure to follow the Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure.
Use it to adjust the color balance and the density oflight areas of each color when the output is from anexternal image controller.• Be sure to follow the Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure.• If fogging is noted, increase the value.• To increase the degree of reproduction of
extremely light areas, decrease the setting.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-83
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-TR COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the transfer high-voltage output by condition.
Level 3
HV-TR
TR-L1
TR-L2
TR-N1
TR-N2
TR-T1
TR-T2
TR-UT1
TR-UT2
TR-S1-1
TR-S2-1
TR-OHP
TR-POST
Remarks
-4 to +4Unit: 1.0 µA
-4 to +4Unit: 1.0 µA
The copier may be adapted tothe site of installation(temperature, humidity) bychanging its various settings.For this mode, you will findsettings grouped into threezones (A, B, C). On the Level3 item screen (page 1), besure to adjust Level 3 items ofthe appropriate zones (TEMP,ABS-HUM).Division by Moisture ContentZone A: 0 to 6.17 gZone B: 6.18 to 18.40 gZone C: 18.41 g or more
Description
Use it to adjust the transfer high-voltage output.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for single-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thin paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias forcopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for one-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thick paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for single-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copying using extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias when usingtransparencies.
Use it to adjust the transfer charging bias when usingpostcards.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-84
HV-SP COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the separation charging high-voltage output by condition.
Level 3
HV-SP
SP-L1
SP-L2
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
Remarks
-6 to 0Unit: 50 µA
-6 to 0Unit: 50 µA
The copier may be adapted tothe site of installation(temperature, humidity) bychanging its various settings.For this mode, you will findsettings grouped into threezones (A, B, C). On the Level3 item screen (page 1), besure to adjust Level 3 items ofthe appropriate zones (TEMP,ABS-HUM).Division by Moisture ContentZone A: 0 to 6.17 gZone B: 6.18 to 18.40 gZone C: 18.41 g or more
Description
Use it to adjust the separation DC high-voltageoutput.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thin paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forcopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias for one-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copying using extra thickpaper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whenusing transparencies.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whenusing postcards.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-85
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>ADJUST
Level 3
SP-ON-N1
SP-ON-N2
SP-ON-L1
SP-CN-L2
SP-ON-T1
SP-ON-T2
SP-ONUT1
SP-ONUT2
SP-ON-S1
SP-ON-S2
SP-ONOHP
SP-ON-PT
Remarks
1 to 32In this mode, the blue offset isdecreased; check the settingof COPIER>ANALOG-ABS-HUM, and enter theappropriate value (1 through32) from below.
1: all environment OFF2: 3.03 g or less3: 3.42 g or less4: 3.81 g or less5: 4.21 g or less6: 4.60 g or less7: 4.99 g or less8: 5.38 g or less9: 5.77 g or less10: 6.17 g or less11: 6.65 g or less12: 7.13 g or less13: 7.61 g or less14: 8.09 g or less15: 8.57 g or less16: 9.05 g or less17: 9.53 g or less18: 10.01 g or less19: 10.50 g or less20: 11.44 g or less21: 12.38 g or less22: 13.32 g or less23: 14.26 g or less24: 15.20 g or less25: 16.00 g or less26: 16.80 g or less27: 17.60 g or less28: 18.40 g or less29: 19.20 g or less30: 20.00 g or less31: 20.80 g or less32: 21.60 g or less
For instance, in the case of 5g, enter '8' for the paper typein question so that theseparation re-chargingmechanism will turn on whenthe moisture content is 0 to5.38 g.
Description
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging ONenvironment adjustment value for copying on the2nd side of a double-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying or copying on the 1st side of a double-sidedcopy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for copying on the2nd side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for copying on the2nd side of a double-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for copying on the2nd side of a double-sided copy using extra thickpaper.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value for single-sidedcopying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value using transparencies.
Use it to adjust the separation re-charging onenvironment adjustment value using postcards.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-86
HV-IEL COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the internal static eliminating high-voltage output by condition.
Level 3
HV-IEL
IEL-L1
IEL-L2
IEL-N1
IEL-N2
IEL-T1
IEL-T2
IEL-UT1
IEL-UT2
IEL-S1-1
IEL-S2-1
IEL-OHP
IEL-POST
Remarks
-8 to 0Unit: 0.5 kV
-8 to 0Unit: 0.5 kV
The copier may be adapted tothe site of installation(temperature, humidity) bychanging its various settings.For this mode, you will findsettings grouped into threezones (A, B, C). On the Level3 item screen (page 1), besure to adjust Level 3 items ofthe appropriate zones (TEMP,ABS-HUM).Division by Moisture ContentZone A: 0 to 6.17 gZone B: 6.18 to 18.40 gZone C: 18.41 g or more
Description
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating high-voltage output.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor single-sided copying and when copying on the1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biaswhen copying on the 2nd side of a double-sidedcopy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor single-sided copying and copying on the 1st sideof a double-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor one-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biaswhen copying on the 2nd side of a double-sidedcopy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor single-sided copying and when copying on the1st side of a double-sided copy using extra thickpaper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biaswhen copying on the 2nd side of a double-sidedcopy using extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor single-sided copying and copying on the 1st sideof a double-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biasfor single-sided copying and copying on the 1st sideof a double-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biaswhen using transparencies.
Use it to adjust the internal static eliminating biaswhen using postcards.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-87
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-ATT COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the attraction charging high-voltage output by condition.
Level 3
HV-ATT
ATT-L1
ATT-L2
ATT-N1
ATT-N2
ATT-T1
ATT-T2
ATT-UT1
ATT-UT2
ATT-S1
ATT-S2
ATT-OHP
ATT-POST
Remarks
-5 to +5Unit: 2 µA
-5 to +5Unit: 2 µA
The copier may be adapted tothe site of installation(temperature, humidity) bychanging its various settings.For this mode, you will findsettings grouped into threezones (A, B, C). On the Level3 item screen (page 1), besure to adjust Level 3 items ofthe appropriate zones (TEMP,ABS-HUM).Division by Moisture ContentZone A: 0 to 6.17 gZone B: 6.18 to 18.40 gZone C: 18.41 g or more
Description
Use it to adjust the attraction high-voltage output.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thin paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forcopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias for one-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thick paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copy using extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias whenusing transparencies.
Use it to adjust the attraction charging bias whenusing postcards.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-88
DOC-REC COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the original detection area/slice level.
Level 3
DA-XSDA-XEDA-YSDA-YE(Note 1)
DS-DOC(Note 1)
Remarks
-99 to +99(0 to 6.3 mm)Standard:SX=24XE=8YS=32YE=24Unit: 0.06 mm (approx.)
0 to 31(density level of 0 to 248)Standard: 21
Description
Fine-Adjusting the Original Detection AreaIf an original is placed on the copyboard glass at anangle, its copy will be framed in black by the workof original detection mode. Use this item to makesettings so as to remove such frames.Keep in mind that a change in the settings will affectthe frame width in original detection mode while theprojector is in use.
Adjusting the Slice Level for Original DetectionYou may set a slice level of your choice for originaldetection.A higher slice level will increase the degree ofdetection of an original, but at the same time willlead to wrong detection.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-89
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
FEED-ADJ COPIER>ADJUST
Level 3
ATT-T-A
ATT-T-B
RG-XA
RG-XB
RG-Y
TR-DLY-A
TR-DLY-B
ATT-CHK
ATT-ON
RGST-CHK
RGST-ON
TR1-CHK
TR2-CHK
TR1-ON
TR2-ON
TR-END-A
TR-END-B
Remarks
-10 to +10Unit: 0.4 mm
-47 to +47Unit: 0.06 mm
-70 to +70
-10 to +10Unit: 0.4 mm
1: 2-sheet retention (sides Band A)
2: side A retention3: side B retention
OK key to start; auto stop
1: 2-sheet retention (sides Band A)
2: side A retention3: side B retention
OK key to start; auto stop
OK key to start; auto stop
0 to 25Unit: 0.4 mm
Executes test printing at TR2-ON.
Description
Use it to enter a transfer drum side A attractiontiming adjustment value.
Use it to enter a transfer drum side B attractiontiming adjustment value.
Use it to enter a registration (point of attraction)fine-adjustment value for transfer drum side A subscanning direction (feeding direction).
Use it to enter a registration (point of attraction)fine-adjustment value for transfer drum side B subscanning direction (feeding direction).
Use it to enter a registration (point of attraction)fine-adjustment value for transfer drum mainscanning direction (drum axial).
Enter a fine-adjustment value for the transfer delayon side A of the transfer drum.
Enter a fine-adjustment value for the transfer delayon side B of the transfer drum.
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during ATT-ON.
Use it to execute attraction of copy paper to thetransfer drum according to ATT-CHK settings.
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during RGST-ON.
Use it to execute printing for checking registration(side of retention) using C according to RGST-CHKsettings.
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during TR1-ON.
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during TR2-ON.
Use it to execute printing for checking a 1-mmleading edge margin according to TR1-CHKsettings.
Use it to execute printing for checking an 8-mmleading edge margin according to TR2-CHKsettings.
Use it to adjust the falling edge (trailing edgemargin) of transfer high voltage for side A retention.
Use it to adjust the falling edge (training edgemargin) of transfer high voltage for side B retention.• Be sure to make adjustments whenever you have
replaced the transfer drum unit.• A lower setting will shift the point at which
blurring starts toward the trailing edge.
1: 2-sheet retention (sides Band A)
2: side A retention3: side B retention
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-90
CST-ADJAdjusts cassette-/manual feed-related items.
Level 3
C2-STMTR
C2-A4R
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
C1-LVOL
C1-HVOL
C2-LVOL
C2-HVOL
C3-LVOL
C3-HVOL
Remarks
0 to 1023When you have replaced theCPU PCB or initialized theRAM of the DC -CPU, enterthe values recorded on theservice label.
Description
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value forSTMTR in cassette 2.
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4Rin cassette 2.
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value forSTMTR in cassette 3 (for CLC1150, cassette 2).
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4Rin cassette 3 (for CLC1150, cassette 2).
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4Rin the multifeeder.
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A6Rin the multifeeder.
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 inthe multifeeder.
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 1 paperlevel detecting VR (for 50 sheets).
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 1 paperlevel detecting VR (for 275 sheets).
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 2 (forCLC1150, cassette 1) paper level detecting VR (for50 sheets).
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 2 (forCLC1150, cassette 1), paper level detecting VR (for275 sheets).
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 3 (forCLC1150, cassette 2) paper level detecting VR (for50 sheets).
Use it to enter a slice level for the cassette 3 (forCLC1150, cassette 2) paper level detecting VR (for275 sheets).
0 to 1023When you have replaced theCPU PCB or initialized theRAM of the DC-CPU, enterthe values recorded on theservice label.If you have replaced the paperwidth sensor, executeCOPIER>FUNCTION>CST.
4-91
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
MISC COPIER>ADJUST
Level 3
SEG-ADJ
K-ADJ
ATT-RTN1
ATT-RTN2
ATT-RTN3
ATT-RTN4
BC-ADJ
ACS-ADJ
Remarks
-3 to +3
-3 to +3
0 to 1
-3 to +3A higher setting will decreasethe recognition range (i.e., alight color or a dark color willbe identified as white orblack, respectively).
-6 to +6
Description
Use it to adjust the separation level between text andphoto in text/photo mode or text/silver halide mode.
Use it to correct the black text mechanism.
Use it to add a single rotation to attraction rotationfor single-sided copying and copying on the 1st sideof double-sided copying using plain paper (fullcolor/ black).
Use it to add a single rotation to attraction rotationfor copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper (full color/black).
Use it to add a single attraction rotation for single-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of a double-sided copy using thin paper (full color/black).
Use it to add a single rotation to attraction rotationfor copying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thin paper (full color/black).
Use it to adjust the color recognition range whenpattern processing is not performed.
Use it to adjust the color recognition sensitivity forACS.
SENS-ADJAdjusts sensor-related items.
Level 3
CLN-TH
CLN-TMP
Remarks
2300 to 5500Unit: mV
0 to 60Unit: °CWhen you have replaced theCPU PCB or initialized theRAM of the DC-CPU, be sureto enter the values recordedon the service label.If you have replaced the pre-cleaning paper sensor or thephotosensitive drum, orremoved the sensor unit, besure to executeCOPIER>FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ>CLN-OFST aftercleaning the sensor unit.
Description
Use it to enter a thermal correction value for the pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71).
Use it to enter a thermal correction value for the pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS71).
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-92
HV-SP-AC COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the separation charging AC high-voltage output by condition.
Level 3
HV-SP(Note 1)
SP-N1
SP-N2
SP-T1
SP-T2
SP-UT1
SP-UT2
SP-S1-1
SP-S2-1
SP-OHP
SP-POST
SP-L1
SP-L2(Note 1)
Remarks
-4 to +4Unit: 0.5 kV
-4 to +4Unit: 0.5 kV
The copier may be adapted tothe site of installation(temperature, humidity) bychanging its various settings.For this mode, you will findsettings grouped into threezones (A, B, C). On the Level3 item screen (page 1), besure to adjust Level 3 items ofthe appropriate zones (TEMP,ABS-HUM).Division by Moisture ContentZone A: 0 to 6.17 gZone B: 6.18 to 18.40 gZone C: 18.41 g or more
Description
Use it to adjust the separation AC high-voltageoutput.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using plain paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forcopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing plain paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias for one-sided copying and when copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copying using extra thickpaper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing extra thick paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 1.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and copying on the 1st side of adouble-sided copy using special paper 2.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whenusing transparencies.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whenusing postcards.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias forsingle-sided copying and when copying on the 1stside of a double-sided copy using thin paper.
Use it to adjust the separation charging bias whencopying on the 2nd side of a double-sided copyusing thin paper.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-93
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
HV-PSTCL COPIER>ADJUSTAdjusts the post-cleaning high-voltage output.
Level 1
HV-PSTCL(Note 1)
Remarks
-6 to +6Unit: 20 µA
Description
Adjusting the Post-Cleaning High Voltage• Increase the setting if a width of about 5 cm along
the leading edge of paper is dark when makinghalftone copies.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
Feeder-Related Items FEEDER>ADJUST
Level 3
ADJ-RX
ADJ-RY
ADJ-DX
ADJ-DY
Remarks
-50 to +50Unit: 0.1 mm
Description
Use it to adjust the registration in sub scanningdirection with the feeder in use.
Use it to adjust the registration in main scanningdirection with the feeder in use.
Use it to adjust the registration in sub scanningdirection with the feeder in use in manual mode.
Use it to adjust the registration in main scanningdirection with the feeder in use in manual feedmode.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-94
Projector-Related Items PRJ>ADJUST
Level 3
DS-PRJ
DS-OHP
RD-XSRD-XERD-YSRD-YE
DA-XSDA-XEDA-YSDA-YE
Remarks
0 to 31Standard: 28
0 to 31Standard: 22
-300 to +300Unit: 0.06 mmStandard: 0
-99 to +99Standard: 0
XS, XEUnit: 0.11 mm
YS, YEUnit: 0.06 mm
Description
Use it to adjust the slice level for projection areadetection with the projector in use.
Use it to adjust the slice level for original detectionin reference to the reference sheet of film (e.g., 6x6,8x10) placed on the copyboard glass with theprojector in use.
Use it to adjust the read area when the originaldetection mechanism is off or when originaldetection fails even when the original detectionmechanism is on with the projector in use.
Use it to adjust the read area when the originaldetection mechanism is on with the projector in use.• This is also used for the read area when the
original detection mechanism is off in copyboardmode.
Figure 4-12
4-95
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PRJ>ADJUST
Level 3
NEGA-BNEGA-GNEGA-R
POSI-BPOSI-GPOSI-R
N-LMT
N-G-LMT
P-LMT
P-G-LMT
OHP-LMT
P-DA-XSP-DA-XEP-DA-YSP-DA-YE
N-DA-XSN-DA-XEN-DA-YSN-DA-YE
O-DA-XSO-DA-XEO-DA-YSODAS-YE
CHNGR-X
CHNGR-Y
Remarks
0 to 255 (effective range: 32to 63)
0 to 255 (effective range: 32to 48)
0 to 255 (effective range: 32to 41)
0 to 255 (effective range: 32to 41)
0 to 255 (effective range: 32to 41)
-99 to +99Unit: 0.6 mm (approx.)Standard:XS=24XE=8YS=32YE=24
-99 to +99Unit: 0.6 mm (approx.)Standard: 50
-99 to +99Unit: 0.6 mm (approx.)Standard:XS=24XE=8YS=32YE=24
-99 to +99Unit: 0.6 mm (approx.)Standard: 0
Description
Use it to adjust the target value for shadingcorrection when copying negative film with theprojector in use.
Use it to adjust the target value for shadingcorrection when copying positive film with theprojector in use.
Use it to change the limit for the projector lamp innegative normal mode with the projector in use
Use it to change the limit for the projector lamp innegative copyboard mode with the projector in use.
Use it to change the limit for the projector inpositive normal mode with the projector in use.
Use it to change the limit for the projector inpositive copyboard mode with the projector in use.
Use it to change the limit for the projector intransparency mode with the projector in use.
Use it to adjust the degree of the positive filmoriginal frame erasing mechanism with the projectorin use.
Use it to adjust the degree of negative film originalframe erasing mechanism with the projector in use.
Use it to adjust the degree of transparency filmoriginal erasing mechanism with the projector inuse.
Use it to adjust the position in main scanningdirection with the projector rotary changer in use.
Use it to adjust the position in sub scanning directionwith the projector rotary changer in use.
-100 to +100A higher value darkens thecolor.B → YG → MR → C
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-96
Editor-Related Items EDITOR>ADJUST
Level 3
ED-X
ED-Y(Note 1)
LOOP-MB(Note 1)
LOOP-TH(Note 1)
MRK-MB
MRK-TH
Remarks
-99 to +99Unit: 0.13 mm (approx.)Standard: 0
0 to 3Standard: 0
0 to 255Standard: 192
0 to 3Standard: 0
0 to 255Standard: 128
Description
Use it to adjust the input coordinates in editor subscanning (X) direction.
Use it to adjust the input coordinates in editor mainscanning (Y) direction.
Use it to adjust processing for reading images intomemory when coloring in area select/color createmode.• A higher setting makes filling of gaps easier, but
too high a setting can lead to bleeding.
Use it to adjust the binary slice level for readingimages into memory when coloring in area select/color create mode.• A higher setting enables reading fine lines.
Use it to adjust processing for reading images intomemory in marker select/point select mode.• A higher setting makes filling of gaps easier.
Use it to adjust the binary slice level for readingimages into memory in marker select/point selectmode.• A higher setting enable reading fine lines.
Note 1: Execute this mode upon replacement of a CPU PCB or initialization of the RAM. The settingswill be returned to standard settings, requiring you to enter the appropriate settings. Be sure torecord any new settings on the service label.
4-97
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
E. FUNCTION (operation check mode)
COPIER>FUNCTION Items
Level 1
FUNCTION
Level 2
INSTALL
Level 3
SPLY-Y
SPLY-M
SPLY-C
SPLY-K
STIR-Y
STIR-M
STIR-C
STIR-K
STIR-4
INIT-Y
INIT-M
INIT-C
INIT-K
INIT-4
RECV-Y
RECV-M
RECV-C
RECV-K
HP-STR-Y
Description
rotates the cylinder to supply Y developer to thedeveloping assembly (OK key to start, Stop key tostop)rotates the cylinder to supply M developer to thedeveloping assembly (OK key to start, Stop key tostop)rotates the cylinder to supply C developer to thedeveloping assembly (OK key to start, Stop key tostop)rotates the cylinder to supply Bk developer to thedeveloping assembly (OK key to start, Stop key tostop)stirs the developer inside the Y developingassembly (OK key to start; auto stop in about 2min)stirs the developer inside the M developingassembly (OK key to start; auto stop in about 2min)stirs the developer inside the C developingassembly (OK key to start; auto stop in about 2min)stirs the developer inside the Bk developingassembly (OK key to start; auto stop in about 2min)stirs the developer inside the four color developingassemblies in sequence (OK key to start; auto stopin about 9 min)reads the initial value of the Y toner concentrationsignal SGNL, REF (OK key to start; auto stop)reads the initial value of the M toner concentrationsignal SGNL, REF (OK key to start; auto stop)reads the initial value of the C toner concentrationsignal SGNL, REF (OK key to start; auto stop)reads the initial value of the Bk toner concentrationsignal SGNL, REF (OK key to start; auto stop)reads the initial values of the 4 color tonerconcentration signals SGNL, REF in sequence(OK key to start; auto stop)rotates the cylinder to draw the developer from theY developing assembly (OK key to start; Stop keyto stop)rotates the cylinder to draw the developer from theM developing assembly (OK key to start; Stop keyto stop)rotates the cylinder to draw the developer from theC developing assembly (OK key to start; Stop keyto stop)rotates the cylinder to draw the developer from theBk developing assembly (OK key to start; Stopkey to stop)stirs the toner inside the Y hopper at time ofinstallation (OK key to start; auto stop)
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-98
CCD
LASER
ATTRACT
HP-STR-M
HP-STR-C
HP-STR-K
HP-STR-4
INIT-D
INIT-P
CCD-ADJ
ADJEC-AADJEC-BCADJEC-BN
POWER ---
T-V00 ---
T-VFF ---
P2-V00 ---
P3-VFF-1 ---
P3-VFF-2 ---
P3-VFF-3 ---
P3-VFF-4 ---
ATT-CHK
ATT-ON
RGST-CHK
RGST-ON
TR1-CHK
TR1-ON
TR2-CHK
stirs the toner inside the M hopper at time ofinstallation (OK key to start; auto stop)stirs the toner inside the C hopper at time ofinstallation (OK key to start; auto stop)stirs the toner inside the Bk hopper at time ofinstallation (OK key to start; auto stop)stirs the toner inside the four color hoppers at time ofinstallation (OK key to start; auto stop)reads black toner concentration sensor output dataonce again (OK key to start; auto stop)for R&D
executes shading correction using the standard whiteplate (OK key to start; auto stop, indicating END fornormal and ERR for error)for future expansionfor future expansionfor future expansion
turns on the laser output for laser power adjustment(OK key to start; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking T-V00 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking T-VFF (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking P3-V00 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking P3-VFF-1 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking P3-VFF-2 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking P3-VFF-3 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)turns on the laser for checking P3-VFF-4 (OK key tostart; Stop key to stop)
selects a point of attraction on the transfer duringATT-ON (1: 2-sheet retention of sides B and A; 2:side A retention; 3: side B retention)executes attraction of copy paper to the transferdrum according to ATT-CHK settings (OK key tostart; auto stop)selects a point of attraction on the transfer duringRGST-ON (1: 2-sheet retention of sides B and A; 2:side A retention; 3: side B retention)executes printing for checking the point ofregistration (side of attraction) using C according toRGST-CHK settings (OK key to start; auto stop)selects a point of attraction on the transfer drumduring TR1-ON (1: 2-sheet retention of sides B andA; 2: side A retention; 3: side B retention)executes printing for checking a 1-mm leading edgemargin according to TR1-CHK settings (1: 2-sheetretention of sides B and A; 2: side A retention; 3:side B retention)selects a point of attraction on the transfer drumduring TR2-ON (1: 2-sheet retention of sides B andA; 2: side A retention; 3: side B retention)
Cont'd Cont'd
4-99
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
DPC
CST
CLEANING
FIXING
PANEL
PART-CHK
TR2-ON
TR3-CHKTR3-ONTR4-CHKTR4-ON
DPC
OFST
INIT
C2-STMTR
C2-A4R
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
KCLN
NIP-CHK
PUMP-ON
LCD-CHK
LED-CHK
LED-OFFKEY-CHK
TOUCHCHK
CL
CL-ON
FAN
executes printing for checking an 8-mm leading edgemargin according to TR2-CHK settings (OK key tostart; auto stop)for R&Dfor R&Dfor R&Dfor R&D
executes measurement of potential on thephotosensitive drum (OK key to start; auto stop)executes offset adjustment of the potentialmeasurement circuit of the photosensitive drum (OKkey to start; auto stop)executes initialization of the photosensitive drumpotential measurement data (OK key to start; autostop)stores paper width detection reference point 1 forSTMTR paper in cassette 2 (OK key to start; autostop)stores paper width detection reference point 2 forA4R paper in cassette 2 (OK key to start; auto stop)stores paper width detection reference point 1 forSTMTR paper in cassette 3 (OK key to start; autostop)stores paper width detection reference point 2 forA4R paper in cassette 3 (OK key to start; auto stop)stores paper width detection reference point 1 forA4R paper in multifeeder (OK key to start; autostop)stores paper width detection reference point 2 forA6R paper in multifeeder (OK key to start; auto stop)stores paper width detection reference point 3 for A4paper in multifeeder (OK key to start; auto stop)rotates the polishing roller while rotating the transferdrum (OK key to start and rotate for about 5 min;auto stop)generates output for measuring the fixing nip with(OK key to start; cyan image output generated anddelivered automatically)turns on the fixing oil pump (OK key to start; Stopkey to stop)checks the LCD for missing dots (OK key to start; alldots turned on, and changed to blue; Stop key to stop)starts a check on the LEDs on the control panel (OKkey to start; LEDs turned on in sequence)ends a check on the LEDs on the control panelstarts a check on key inputs from the control panel(press on highlighted item to end)checks the touch panel of the control panel (+indicated on LCD pressed repeatedly to movethrough highlighted items)selects each clutch (enter parts No., and press OKkey to select)starts the operation of the clutch selected by 'CL'(OK key to start; Stop key to stop)selects each key (enter part No., and press OK key toselect)
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-100
CLEAR
MISC-R
MISC-P
SENS-ADJ
FAN-ON
MTR
MTR-ON
SL
SL-ON
SHV
SHV-ON
ERR
DC-CON
R-CONMMI-COPY
SERVICE
JAM-HISTERR-HISTE354-CLRE355-CLR
SCANLAMP
SC-MOVE
RESERVE1RESERVE2RESERVE3RESERVE4
DRUM-ROT
POWEROFF
B-HP
B-ATT-TR
B-TR
B-CLN
CLN-OFST
starts the operation of the fan selected by 'FAN' (OKkey to start; stop key to stop)selects each motor (enter the part No., and press theOK key to select)starts the operation of the motor selected in 'MTR'(OK key to start; auto stop in 20 sec)selects each solenoid (enter part No., and press OKkey to select)starts the operation of the solenoid selected in 'SL'(OK key to start; Stop key to stop)selects each high-voltage output (enter high-voltageNo., and press OK to select)starts operation of the high-voltage output selected in'SHV' (OK key to start; auto stop)
clears an error code (E000, E005, E008, E020,E717; OK key to start; turn off and then on powerswitch)initializes the RAM of the DC-CPU (OK key tostart)initializes the RAM of the R-CPU (OK key to start)initializes the RAM of the PANEL-CPU (OK key tostart)initializes the backup data of service mode (OK keyto start)clears the jam history (OK key to start)clears the error history (OK key to start)--
turns on the scanning lamp (OK key to start; autostop after several sec)starts scanner movement (OK key to start; 1: HP toA, 2: HP to B, 3: HP to C, 4: HP)for R&Dfor R&Dfor R&Dfor R&D
rotates the photosensitive drum to rotate idly for aspecific period of time (OK key to start; auto stop)executes a check on the operation of auto power-off(OK key to start)rotates the attraction/transfer locking cam motor tomove the cam to HP (OK key to start; auto stop)rotates the attraction/transfer locking cam motor tomove the cam to the attraction/transfer position (OKkey to start; auto stop)rotates the attraction/transfer locking cam motor tomove the cam to the transfer position (OK key tostart; auto stop)rotates the attraction/transfer locking cam motor tomove the cam to the transfer drum cleaning position(OK key to start; auto stop)
starts thermal correction operation of the pre-cleaningpaper sensor (PS72; OK key to start; auto stop)
4-101
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PRJ>FUNCTION Items
Level 1
FUNCTION
Level 2 Level 3
LAMP
CCD
Description
drives the projector lamp for a specific period oftime (OK key to start; auto stop)reads in data and executes gain adjustment at timeof projector installation (OK key to start; autostop)
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-102
INSTALL COPIER>FUNCTIONUsed at time of installation.
Level 3
SPLY-YSPLY-MSPLY-CSPLY-K
STIR-YSTIR-MSTIR-CSTIR-K
STIR-4
INIT-YINIT-MINIT-CINIT-K
INIT-4
RECV-YRECV-MRECV-CRECV-K
RemarksDescription
Use it to rotate the developing cylinder to supply aspecific color developer to the developing assembly.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) To stop, press the Stop key.
Use it to stir the developer inside a specific colordeveloping assembly.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 2
min.
Use it to stir the developer in the four developingassemblies in sequence.1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 9
min.
Use it to read the initial value of a specific tonerconcentration signal SGNL, REF.· The screen (COPIER>ADJUST>DENS) will
show the reading. Be sure to record it on theservice label.
Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 2
min.
Use it to read the initial value of the four color tonerconcentration signals SGNL, REF in sequence.· The screen (COPIER>ADJUST>DENS) will
show the readings. Be sure to record them on theservice label.
Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 9
min.
Use it to rotate the developing cylinder, therebydrawing the developer from a specific colordeveloping assembly.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) To stop, press the stop key.
Note:You will use this mode during installation.
4-103
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Level 3
HP-STR-YHP-STR-MHP-STR-CHP-STR-K
HP-STR-4
INIT-D
INIT-P
RemarksDescription
Use it to stir the toner inside a specific color hopperto prevent blocking at time of installation and hopperunit replacement.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 30
sec.
Note:This item is designed to prevent blocking of tonersupplied to an empty hopper at high speed, asoccurring at time of installation or hopper unitreplacement.
Use it to stir the toner inside the four color hoppers toprevent blocking at time of installation or hopper unitreplacement.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 2
min.
Caution:This item is designed to prevent blocking of tonersupplied to empty hoppers at high speed, asoccurring at time of installation or hopper unitreplacement.
Use it to read the concentration sensor output dataonce again after cleaning the black tonerconcentration sensor to suit the light reflected by thephotosensitive drum.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
for R&D
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-104
CCD COPIER>FUNCTIONExecutes automatic adjustment of CCD-/shading-related items.
Level 3
CCD-ADJ
ADJEC-AADJEC-BCADJEC-BN
Remarks
END: normalERR: error**Try executing the item onceagain.Execute this item if you havereplaced the CCD unit,scanning lamp, imageprocessor, or the standardwhite plate.
Description
Use it to execute shading correction using thestandard white plate.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically, and the
result will be indicated.3) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Caution:Do not open the front cover while executing thismode. Otherwise, the CCD adjustment may fail.
For future expansion.
LASERAdjusts laser-related items.
Level 3
POWER
T-V00
T-VFF
P2-V00
P3-VFF-1
P3-VFF-2
P3-VFF-3
P3-VFF-4
Remarks
OK key to start; Stop key tostop
Description
Use it to turn on the laser output for adjusting thelaser power.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking T-V00.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking T-VFF.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-V00.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-1.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-2.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-3.
Use it to turn on the laser output when checking P3-VFF-4.
4-105
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
ATTRACT COPIER>FUNCTIONExecutes attraction point auto adjustment.
Level 3
ATT-CHK
ATT-ON
RGST-CHK
RGST-ON
TRI-CHK
TRI-ON
RemarksDescription
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during ATT-ON.1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A)2: side A retention3: side B retention
Use it to execute attraction of copy paper to thetransfer drum according to ATT-CHK settings.This item uses the source of paper selected beforestarting service mode.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
Use it to select the point of attraction on the transferdrum during RGST-ON.1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A)2: side A detecting3: side B retention
Use it to execute printing for checking the point ofregistration (side of attraction) using C according toRGST-CHK settings.This mode uses the source of paper selected beforestarting service mode.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during TR1-ON.1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A)2: side A detecting3: side B retention
Use it to execute printing for checking a 1-mmleading edge margin according to TR1-CHK settings.This mode uses the source of paper selected beforestarting service mode.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-106
COPIER>FUNCTION
Level 3
TR2-CHK
TR2-ON
TR3-CHK
TR3-ON
TR4-CHK
TR4-ON
RemarksDescription
Use it to select a point of attraction on the transferdrum during TR2-ON.1: 2-sheet retention (sides B and A)2: side A detecting3: side B retention
Use it to execute printing for checking an 8-mmleading edge margin according to TR2-CHK settings.This mode uses the source of paper selected beforestarting service mode.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
for R&D
for R&D
for R&D
for R&D
DPCMeasures the potential of the photosensitive drum.
Level 3
DPC
OFST
INIT
RemarksDescription
Use it to execute measurement of the potential of thephotosensitive drum.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
Use it to execute offset adjustment of the potentialmeasurement circuit of the photosensitive drum.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
Use it to execute initialization of the measurementdata on the potential of the photosensitive drum ifDPC cannot be executed normally.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
4-107
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
CST COPIER>FUNCTIONExecutes cassette/multifeeder size auto adjustment.
Level 3
C2-STMTRC2-A4RC3-STMTRC3-A4R
MF-A4RMF-A6RMF-A4
Remarks
STMTR width: 139.5 mmA4R width: 210 mmFor fine adjustment afterstoring a reference point, usepaper width basic valueadjustment in ADJUST>CST-ADJ.
A4R width: 210 mmA6R width: 105 mmA4 width: 297 mmFor fine adjustment afterstoring a reference point, usepaper width basic valueadjustment in ADJUST>CST-ADJ.
Description
Use it to store the paper width detection referencepoint for cassette 2/3 (for CLC1150, cassette 3).Using ht Item1) Adjust the side guide pal of the bottommost
cassette to STMTR.2) Select C2-STMTR or C3-STMTR (to highlight),
and press the OK key.3) Likewise, store a reference point for A4R size.
Use it to store the paper width detecting referencepoint for the multifeeder.Using the Item1) Place A4R paper in the multifeeder, and adjust the
side guide to A4R.2) Select MF-A4R (to highlight), and press the OK
key.3) Likewise, store the reference point for A6R and
A4.
CLEANINGChecks cleaning operation.
Level 3
KCLN
Remarks
You cannot stop this modebefore the ongoing job ends.
Description
Use it to rotate the transfer drum while keeping thepolishing roller in contact.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically in about 5
min.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-108
FIXING COPIER>FUNCTIONExecutes automatic adjustment of fixing assembly-related items.
Level 3
NIP-CHK
PUMP-ON
RemarksDescription
Use it to generate an output for measuring the fixingnip width.This mode uses the source of paper selected beforeservice mode is started.Using the Item1) Make about 20 copies of the Test Sheet in A4.2) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.3) A cyan image will automatically be prepared and
discharged.4) Measure the width of the area indicated in the
figure.
Use it to impregnate the felt with oil by running thefixing oil pump for about 10 min when replacing theoil applying felt.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The fixing motor will rotate, and the fixing oil
pump will turn on.2) Press the Stop key to stop.
4-109
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PANEL COPIER>FUNCTIONChecks the activation of the indicators on the control panel.
Level 3
LCD-CHK
LED-CHK
LED-OFF
KEY-CHK
TOUCHCHK
Remarks
See Table 4-4.
This is to match thecoordinates representing apoint on the touch panel andthe LCD.Execute this mode if you havereplaced the LCD.
Description
Use it to check the LCD for missing dots.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The entire LCD will alternately turn on white,
and then blue.2) To stop, press the Stop key.
Use it to start a check on the LEDs on the controlpanel.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The LEDs on the control panel will turn on in
sequence.2) To stop, press LED-OFF.
Use it to end a check on the LEDs on the controlpanel.1) Press the item (highlighted) to end the operation.
Use it to start a check on the key inputs from thecontrol panel.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Press any key to check. If normal, the
corresponding character will appear on the LCD.3) To stop, press KEY-CHK (to highlight) once
again.
Use it to adjust the coordinates of the touch panel onthe control panel.Using the Item1) Select an item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) Press the nine +s appearing on the touch panel in
sequence.3) To stop, press TOUCH-CHK (to highlight) once
again.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-110
Key
Counter Check
ACS
Full Color
Black
Original Recognition
Center Shift
Energy Saver
Stop
Indication
BILL
ACS
F-COLOR
BLACK
SIZE
C-SHIFT
STAND BY
STOP
Key
Start
Clear
0 to 9
ID
Interrupt
Additional Function
Guide
Reset
Indication
START
CLEAR
0 to 9
ID
INTERRUPT
USER
?
RESET
Table 4-4
Input Keys and Indications COPIER>FUNCTION
PART-CHKChecks the operation of various loads.
Level 3
CL
CL-ON
FAN
FAN-ON
MTR
Remarks
See Table 4-5.Codes 13 through 20 are notused.
See Table 4-6.Codes 12 through 20 are notused.
See Table 4-7.Codes 8 through 20 are notused.
Description
Use it to select the clutch to check.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Enter the code of the clutch using the keypad.3) Press the OK key.
Use it to check the operation of the clutch selectedusing CL.1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.· The clutch will tun on.
2) To stop, press the Stop key.
Use it to select the fan to check.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Enter the code of the fan using the keypad.3) Press the OK key.
Use it to check the operation of the fan selected usingFAN.Using the Item1) Select the item to select (to highlight), and press
the OK key.· The fan will turn on.
2) To stop, press the Stop key.
Use it to select the motor to check.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Enter the code of the motor.3) Press the OK key.
4-111
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>FUNCTION
Level 3
MTR-ON
SL
SL-ON
SHV
SHV-ON
Remarks
See Table 4-8.Codes 10 through 20 are notused.
See Table 4-9.Codes 6 through 20 are notused.
Description
Use it to check the operation of the motor selectedusing MTR.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The motor will turn on.
2) In about 20 sec, the operation will stopautomatically.
Use it to select the solenoid to check.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad.3) Press the OK key.
Use it to check the operation of the solenoid selectedusing SL.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The solenoid will turn on.
2) To stop, press the Stop key.
Use it to select the high-voltage output to check.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight).2) Enter the code of the high-voltage output using the
keypad.3) Press the OK key.
Use it to check the operation of the high-voltageoutput selected using SHV.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The high-voltage output will turn on.
2) The operation will stop automatically aftergenerating a specific high-voltage output.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
duplexing feed clutch (CL14)
---
registration clutch (CL9)
multifeeder feed clutch (CL10)
multifeeder pickup clutch (CL16)
deck pickup clutch (CL102)
re-pickup clutch (CL15)
Code
7
8
9
10
11
12
-
Name
cassette 1 pickup clutch (CL11)
cassette 2 pickup clutch (CL12/DCL12)
cassette 3 pickup clutch (CL13/DCL13)
not used
postcard feed clutch (CL18)
buffer path clutch (CL1)
-
Table 4-5
Codes and Clutches
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-112
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
Name
electrical unit cooling fan (FM8)
IP cooling fan (FM7)
exhaust fan (FM2)
ozone suction fan (FM5)
toner suction fan (FM6)
laser scanner motor cooling fan (FM4)
Code
6
7
8
9
10
11
Name
not used
primary charging assembly fan (FM3)
delivery cooling fan (FM11)
original exposure cooling fan 1 (FM1)
not used
original exposure system cooling fan 2/3(FM14/15)
Table 4-6
Codes and Fans COPIER>FUNCTION
Code
0
1
2
3
Name
hopper motor (M10)
transfer drum cleaner brush motor (M8)
not used
duplexing motor (M14)
Code
4
5
6
7
Name
laser scanner motor (M3)
fixing motor (M5)
drum motor (M2)
main motor (M4)
Table 4-7
Codes and Motors
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Name
multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL14)
deck pickup solenoid (SL101)
duplexing paper feed roller solenoid(SL13)
pickup roller 1 solenoid (SL7)
pickup roller 2 solenoid (SL8/DLS8)
Code
5
6
7
8
9
Name
pickup roller 3 solenoid (SL9/DSL9)
buffer path solenoid 1 (SL1)
buffer path solenoid 2 (SL2)
attraction roller solenoid (SL6)
separation claw solenoid (SL4)
Table 4-8
Codes and Solenoids
4-113
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Codes and High-Voltage Outputs COPIER>FUNCTION
Code
0
1
2
3
Description
Absence of high-voltage output
drum motor ONpre-exposure lamp ONphotosensitive drum 1 rotationprimary output, grid output (500 V) ON(wait for stop command; equivalent ofphotosensitive drum 10 rotations)primary output, grid output OFFphotosensitive drum 1 rotationpre-exposure lamp OFFdrum motor OFF
drum motor ONpre-exposure lamp ONphotosensitive drum 1 rotationprimary output, grid output (500 V) ONM color developing assembly locked,developing bias (AC/DC) ON(wait for stop command; equivalent ofphotosensitive drum 10 rotations)M developing assembly unlocked, developingbias (AC/DC) OFFprimary output, grid output OFFphotosensitive drum 1 rotationpre-exposure lamp OFFdrum motor OFF
drum motor ONpre-exposure lamp ONphotosensitive drum 1 rotationprimary output, grid output (500 V) ONC developing assembly locked, developingbias (AC/DC) ON(wait for stop command; equivalent ofphotosensitive drum 10 rotations)C developing assembly unlocked; equivalentof 10 rotations)primary output, grid output OFFphotosensitive rum 1 rotationpre-exposure lap OFFdrum motor OFF
High-voltage output
---
primary output, grid output
primary output, grid output, M colordeveloping bias output
primary output, grid output, C developingbias output
Table 4-9a
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-114
COPIER>FUNCTION
Code
4
5
Description
drum motor ONpr-exposure lamp ONphotosensitive drum 1 rotationprimary output, grid output (500 V) ONY developing assembly locked, developingbias (AC/DC) ON(wait for stop command; equivalent ofphotosensitive drum 10 rotations)Y developing assembly unlocked, developingbias (AC/DC) OFFprimary output, grid output OFFphotosensitive drum 1 rotationpre-exposure lamp OFFdrum motor OFF
drum motor ONpre-exposure lamp ONphotosensitive drum 1 rotationprimary output, grid output (500 V) ONBk color developing assembly locked,developing bias (AC/DC) ON(wait for stop command; equivalent ofphotosensitive drum 10 rotations)Bk developing assembly unlocked,developing bias (AC/DC) OFFprimary output, grid output OFFphotosensitive drum 1 rotationpre-exposure lamp OFFdrum motor OFF
High-voltage output
primary output, grid output, Y developingassembly bias output
primary output, grid output, Bk colordeveloping bias output
Table 4-9b
4-115
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
CLEAR COPIER>FUNCTIONInitializes the RAM, and resets the jam/ error history.
Level 3
ERR
DC-CON
R-CON
MMI-COPY
SERVICE
JAM-HIST
ERR-HIST
E354-CLR
E355-CLR
Remarks
Be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch.Note: 'E020' is indicated only
when the detail code is'xxE0'.
Be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch.
Be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch.
Be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch.
Be sure to turn off and thenon the power switch.
Description
Use it to reset an error code (E000, E005, E008,E020, E717, E719).Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Use it to initialize the RAM of the DC-CPU on theCPU PCB.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Use it to initialize the RAM of the R-CPU on theCPU PCB.1) Select the item (to highlight), and press OK key.2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Use it to initialize the RAM of the PANEL-CPU onthe CPU PCB.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Use it to reset the backup data of service mode.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
Use it to reset the jam history.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The jam history will be reset.
Use it to reset the error history.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The error history will be reset.
---
---
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-116
MISC-R COPIER>FUNCTIONChecks the operation of the reader unit.
Level 3
SCANLAMP
SC-MOVE
RESERVE 1to 4
RemarksDescription
Use it t check the activation of the scanning lamp.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The scanning lamp will remain on for several
seconds, and then will turn off automatically.
Use it to check the operation of the scanner.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The scanner moves to point A, and '1/4' is
indicated on the display.3) Each press on the OK key causes the scanner to
move as follows: HP → B → HP → C → HP.4) The operation ends when the scanner moves to 4
(HP) in response to a press on the OK key.1: HP → A → HP2: HP → B → HP1: HP → C4: HP
For R&D
MISC-PChecks the operation of the printer unit.
Level 3
DRUM-ROT
POWEROFF
RemarksDescription
Use it to rotate the photosensitive drum idly for aspecific period of time.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The photosensitive drum rotates idly for 30 sec,
and will stop automatically.
Use it to check the operation of the auto power-offmechanism.1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.• The power switch will turn off automatically.
4-117
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>FUNCTION
Level 3
B-HP
B-ATT-TR
B-TR
B-CLN
RemarksDescription
Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cammotor, thereby moving the cam to the home position(HP).Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The attraction/transfer locking cam will stop at
HP.
Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cammotor, thereby moving the cam to the point ofattraction/transfer.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The cam will move to the point of attraction/
transfer, and will stop automatically.
Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cammotor, thereby moving the cam to the point oftransfer.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The cam will move to the point of transfer, and
will stop automatically.
Use it to rotate the attraction/transfer locking cammotor, thereby moving the cam to the transfer drumcleaning position.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The cam will move to the transfer drum cleaning
position, and will stop automatically.
SENS-ADJChecks sensor-related operations.
Level 3
CLN-OFST
Remarks
Execute this mode if you haveremoved (e.g., for cleaning)or replaced the pre-cleaningsensor (PS72) or havereplaced the photosensitivedrum.
Description
Use it to execute temperature correction for the pre-cleaning paper sensor (PS72).Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.• The screen (COPIER>ADJUST>SENS-ADJ) will
show the readings. Be sure to record them on theservice label.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-118
Projector-Related Items PRJ>FUNCTION
Level 3
LAMP
CCD
Remarks
Note: Do not execute thismode while the copieris warming up.
Description
Use it to keep the lamp of the projector on for aspecific period of time.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The lamp of the projector will remain on for about
1 min, and will turn off automatically.
Use it to read CCD gain adjustment and data at timeof installing a projector.Using the Item1) Select the item (to highlight), and press the OK
key.2) The operation will stop automatically.
4-119
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
F. OPTION (settings mode)
COPIER>OPTION Items
Level 1
OPTION
Level 2
BODY
USER
Level 3
CCD-DISP
MODEL-SZ
RCPR-MD
F-WEB
PASCAL
PSCL-MD
EC-GLASS
LPSTCL-ON
METAL
OHP-MODE
COPY-LIM
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
CONTROL
COLDOFSTMONO-SPD
Description
use it to switch data display on theDISPLAY>CCD screen (0: normal mode, 1:precious metal mode)use it to switch destination (0: AB (6R, 5E), 1:Inch (5R, 4E), 2: A (3R, 3E), 3: AB/Inch (6R, 5E)Use it to switch over the mode of reciprocatingoperation for the cleaning blade. (0: normal mode;1: reciprocation ON at all times; 2: reciprocationOFF at all times)use it to change the frequency of turning on thefixing cleaning belt (not used; default=0)use it to switch gradation correction data, contrastpotential obtained by auto gradation correction (0:disable, 1: enable)use it to smooth out the gradations on an imagefrom an external image controller (0: as before, 1:smooth out gradation (data) for auto gradationcorrection, 2: enable)use it to select the presence/absence of EC coatingon the copyboard glass (0: absent, 1: present, 2 :notused, 9: for future expansion)use it to switch the post-cleaning chargingmechanism (0: normal, 1: all environments)
use it to turn on/off precious metal mode (0: off, 1:on, default=0)use it to select the copy image maximum densitywhen copying on transparencies (0: Dmax=1.3, 1:Dmax=1.6, default=0)use it to change the upper limit on the copy count(1 to 100)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 1 on thecontrol panel of a 120/230-V model) to suit theuser or dealer (0: no counter; 1 through 95)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 2 on thecontrol panel of a 120/230-V model) to suit theuser or dealer (0: no counter; 1 through 95)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 3 on thecontrol panel of a 120/2300V model) to suit theuser or dealer (0: no counter; 1 through 95)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 4 on thecontrol panel of a 20/230-V model) to suit the useror dealer (0: no counter; 1 through 95)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 5 on thecontrol panel) to suit the user or dealer (0: nocounter; 1 through 95)use it to select a counter type (soft counter 6 on thecontrol panel) to suit the user or dealer (0: nocounter; 1 to 95)use it to enable copying, printing, and scanningwithout the control key, control card, or ID No. input.for R&Dfor R&D
Cont'd Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-120
CST
ACC
INT-FACE
CLR-L-SP
PRJ-L-SP
BKL-L-SP
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
DK-P
COIN
REMOTE
B-CLR
P-PRT-MF
Use it to set placement of 2 sides in copier model (0:normal; 1: prohibit in full color; 2: prohibit in blackmono; 3: prohibit at all times)Use it to set placement of 2 sides when the projectoris in use (0: normal; 1: prohibit in full color; 2:prohibit in black mono; 3: prohibit at all times)Use it to set placement of 2 sides in back-light mode.(0: normal; 1: prohibit in full color; 2: prohibit inblack mono; 3: prohibit at all items)
use it to select a paper size for cassette (Table 13-708)use it to select a paper size for cassette 2 (forCLC1150, cassette 1; Table 13-708)
use it to select a paper size for the paper deck (0: A4,1: B5, 2: LTR)use it to turn on/off the coin vender notation
use it to make settings for connecting an externalcontroller (0 to 7; default: 2)use it to specify the presence/absence of a copy datacontroller (0: not connected, 1: connected)Use it to set priority on manual settings data (papersize, paper type, duplexing) when manual feed isselected with an external image controller in use (0:priority on local, 1: priority on controller; 2: priorityon controller; default=2)
4-121
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PRJ>OPTION Items
Level 1
OPTION
Level 2 Level 3
BK-LIGHT
Description
not used
EDITOR>OPTION Items
Level 1
OPTION
Level 2 Level 3
ED-MODE
Description
use it to switch editor operation mode (0: prohibitinput, 1: 1-point input, 2: continuous input)
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-122
BODY COPIER>OPTION
Level 3
CCD-DISP
MODEL-SZ
RCPR-MD
F-WEB(not used)
PASCAL
PSCL-MD
EC-GLASS
PSTCL-ON
Remarks
0: normal mode1: precious metal mode
0: AB (6R, 5E)1: Inch (5R, 4E)2: A (3R, 3E)3: AB/Inch (6R, 5E)
0: normal1: reciprocation ON at alltimes2: reciprocation OFF at alltimes
default: 0
0: do not use1: use
0: as before1: smooth out gradation (data)for auto gradation correction2: smooth
0: coating provided1: coating not provided2: not used9: for future expansion
0: normal1: ON in all environments
Description
Use it to switch data display within theDISPLAY>CCD screen.
Use it to switch the destination.
Use it to switch cover the mode of reciprocatingoperation for the drum cleaning blade.
Use it to change the frequency of turning on thefixing cleaning belt.
Use it to switch the gradation correction data,contrast potential obtained by auto gradationcorrection
Use it to smooth out the gradation of an image froman external image controller.
Use it to specify the presence/absence of EC coatingon the copyboard glass.• After specifying, be sure to turn off and then on
the power switch.
Use it to switch the post-cleaning chargingmechanism.• Take advantage of the item if memory or cyan/
black dots appear on the edges of paper in a lowhumidity environment.
4-123
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
USER COPIER>OPTIONSelects user-related settings.
Level 3
METAL
OHP-MODE
COPY-LIM
COUNTER1COUNTER2COUNTER3COUNTER4
COUNTER5COUNTER6
CONTROL
Remarks
0: off1: ondefault: 0
0: Dmax=1.31: Dmax=1.6Default: 0
1 through 100
0: do not indicate1 to 95See Table 4-10.
0: do not indicate1 to 95See Table 4-10.
Settings of each digit: 0 to 4Standard for each digit: 0CONTROL xxx
1st digit2nd digit3rd digit
Description
Use it to turn on and off precious mode.
Use it to select the copy image maximum density orcopying on transparencies.
Use it to change the upper limit on the copy count.
Use it to select a counter type to suit the user ordealer (soft counter 1 through 4 on the control panelof a 120/230-V model).
Use it to select a counter type to suit the use or dealer(soft counter 5/6 on the control panel).
In the absence of a control key, control card, or IDNo. input, copying, remote printing, or remotescanning is permitted with conditions by changingthe last three digits of CONTROL.
• Disabling Control Key with Conditions
1st digit ofCONTROL
0
1
2
3
4
Black-and-white copying
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Remotescanning
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Remoteprinting
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
Note: See the Reference Table.
• Disabling Control Card with Conditions
2nd digit ofCONTROL
0
1
2
3
4
Black-and-white copying
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Remotescanning
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Remoteprinting
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
Note: See the Reference Table.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-124
Level 3
CONTROL
Remarks
* Copy data controller orremote diagnostic device.
Description
• Disabling ID Number Input with Conditions
3rd digit ofCONTROL
0
1
2
3
4
Black-and-white copying
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Remotescanning
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Remoteprinting
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
Note: See the Reference Table.
Reference Table
Counter type
Counter checkscreen counter
CC-V Card counter
CC-X Card counter
- Device* total
ID No. counter
Disablingcontrol
key withconditions
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DisablingID No.
input withconditions
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Disablingcontrol
card withconditions
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
Yes: increment the count.No: do not increment the count.
Guide to the Reference TableThe counter on the Counter Check screen isincremented under all conditions; i.e., disablingcontrol key, control card, or ID No. input withconditions.1 For CC-V
In the case of '3' or '4' for black-and-white copyingwithout a card, the CC-V card counter will not beincremented.In the case of '2', '3', or '4' for remote printingwithout a card, the CC-V card counter will not beincremented.In the case of '2' or '4' for remote printing, the CC-V card counter will not be incremented regardlessof the presence/absence of a CC-V card.
4-125
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Level 3
CONTROL
COLDOFST
MONO-SPD
CLR-L-SP
PRJ-L-SP
BKL-L-SP
Remarks
* copy data controller orremote diagnostic device.
0: normal1: prohibit in full color2: prohibit in black mono3: prohibit at all times(invalid in printer mode)
Description
2 For device*The device* total counter is incremented under allconditions; i.e., disabling control key, controlcard, or ID No. input with conditions.In the case of '3' or '4' for black-and-white copyingwithout a card, the copy data controller cardcounter will not be incremented.In the case of '2', '3', or '4' for remote printingwithout a card, the copy data controller cardcounter will not be incremented.In the case of '2' or '4' for remote printing, thecopy data controller card counter will beincremented regardless of the presence/absence ofa copy data controller card.
3 With ID No. Registration in UseFor '3' or '4' for black-and-white copying withoutan ID No. input, the counter for the group inquestion for the ID. No. will not be incremented.For '2', '3', or '4' for remote printing without an IDNo. input, the counter for the group in question forthe ID No. will not be incremented.For '2' or '4' for remote printing, the counter forthe group in question for the ID No. will not beincremented regardless of the presence/absence ofan ID No. or password input.
Example• When CONTROL is set to '002',
In the absence of a control key, remote printingand remote scanning are possible.In the absence of a control card, no job is possible.In the absence of an ID No. input, no job ispossible.
• When CONTROL is set to '421',In the absence of a control key, only remotescanning is possible.In the absence of a control card, remote printingand remote scanning are possible.In the absence of an ID No. input, black-and-whitecopying, remote printing, are remote scanning arepossible.
for R&D
for R&D
Use it to set placement of 2 sides in copier mode.
Use it to set placement of 2 sides when the projectoris in use.
Use it to set placement of 2 sides in back-light modewith the projector in use.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-126
CST COPIER>OPTIONSelects cassette-related settings.
Level 3
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
Remarks
See Table 4-11.
Description
Use it to select a paper size for cassette 1.
Use it to select a paper size for cassette 2 (forCLC1150, cassette 1).
ACCSelects accessory-related settings.
Level 3
COIN
DK-P
Remarks
0: A41: B52: LTR
Description
Use it to turn on/off the coin vendor notation.
Use it to select a paper size for the paper deck.
INT-FACESelects interface-related settings.
Level 3
REMOTE
B-CLR
P-PRT-MF
Remarks
default: 2Controller Parameters• original type (photo, auto,
text)• sharpness• color balanceCopier Parameters• density• background level
adjustment• hue, saturation, etc.
0: not connected (detached)1: connected
Controller Parameters• paper size• paper type• duplexing
Description
Use it to make settings when an external controller isconnected.0: local; priority on the settings selected on the
copier.1: remote 1; uses parameters selected on the
controller, with the remaining settings from thecopier
2: remote 2; uses parameters selected on thecontroller, with the remaining settings from thefactory defaults of the copier
Note:If you selected '0' for this item, be sure to set allcolor balance settings under 'print color' of usermode (adjust/cleaning) to '+5'.
Use it to specify the presence/absence of a copy datacontroller.
Use it to select priority on settings data for manualpickup with an external image controller in use (localor controller).0: local; priority on the settings of the copier1: remote 1; uses parameters selected on the
controller, with the remaining settings from thecopier
2: remote 2; uses parameters selected on thecontroller, with the remaining settings from thefactory defaults of the copier
4-127
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Soft Counter Specifications
Counter
no indication
total 1
total 2
total (full color 1)
total (full color 2)
total (mono color)
total (black-and-white1)
total (black-and-white2)
total (large)
total (small)
copy 1
copy 2
copy (full color 1)
copy (full color 2)
copy (mono color 1)
copy (mono color 2)
copy (black-and-white 1)
copy (black-and-white 2)
copy (full color, large)
copy (full color, small)
copy (mono color, large)
copy (mono color, small)
copy (black-and-white, large)
copy (black-and-white, small)
copy (full color, large, double-sided)
copy (mono color, small, double-sided)
copy (mono color, large, double-sided)
copy (mono color, small, double-sided)
copy (black-and-white, large,double-sided)
copy (black-and-white, small,double-sided)
Function
-
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Color
-
All
All
4C
4C
Mono
Bk
Bk
All
All
All
All
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
Paper size
-
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
Count fordouble-
sided sheet
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
Incrementfor large-size sheet
-
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
-
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
Table 4-10a
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-128
No.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Counter
print 1
print 2
print (full color 1)
print (full color 2)
print (mono color 1)
print (mono color 2)
print (black-and-white 1)
print (black-and-white 2)
Function
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Color
All
All
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
Paper size
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Count fordouble-
sided sheet
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Incrementfor large-size sheet
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Table 4-10a
4-129
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Table 4-10b
No.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Counter
print (full color, large)
point (full color, small)
print (mono color, large)
print (mono color, small)
print (black-and-white, large)
print (black-and-white, small)
print (full color, large, double-sided)
print (full color, small, double-sided)
print (mono color, large, double-sided)
print (mono color, small, double-sided)
print (black-and-white, large,double-sided)
print (black-and-white, small,double-sided)
copy scan (full color, large)
copy scan (full color, small)
copy scan (black-and-white, large)
copy scan (black-and-white, small)
copy + print (full color, large)
copy + print (full color, small)
copy + print (black-and-white,large)
copy + print (black-and-white,small)
copy + print (black-and-white 2)
copy + print (black-and-white 1)
copy + print (full color + monocolor, large)
copy + print (full color + monocolor, small)
copy + print (full color + monocolor , 2)
copy + print (full color + monocolor, 1)
copy (full color + mono color,large)
copy (full color + mono color,small)
Function
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
S
S
S
S
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C
C
Color
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
4C
4C
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
4C
4C
Bk
Bk
4C
4C
Bk
Bk
Bk
Bk
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
Paper size
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
M
M
L
S
M
M
L
S
Count fordouble-
sided sheet
-
-
-
-
-
-
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Incrementfor large-size sheet
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
2
1
1
-
2
1
1
-
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-130
No.
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Counter
copy (full color + mono color, 2)
copy (full color + mono color, 1)
print (full color + mono color,large)
print (full color + mono color,small)
print (full color + mono color, 2)
print (full color + mono color, 1)
copy + print (large)
copy + print (small)
copy + print (2)
cop + ring (1)
Function
C
C
P
P
P
P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
Color
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
4C+Mono
All
All
All
All
Paper size
M
M
L
S
M
M
L
S
M
M
Count fordouble-
sided sheet
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Incrementfor large-size sheet
2
1
1
-
2
1
1
-
2
1
Table 4-10b
4-131
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
No.
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Counter
copy (large)
copy (small)
print (large)
print (small-size)
total (mono-color, large)
total (mono-color, small)
total (black-and-white, large)
total (black-and-white, small)
copy scan (full-color)
copy scan (black-and-white)
copy scan (large)
copy scan (small)
copy scan (total)
copy scan (large-size; 4)
copy scan (small-size; 4)
copy scan (total; 4)
Function
C
C
P
P
C+P
C+P
C+P
C+P
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Color
All
All
All
All
Mono
Mono
Bk
Bk
4C
Bk
All
All
All
All
All
All
Paper size
L
S
L
S
L
S
L
S
M
M
L
S
M
L
S
M
Count fordouble-
sided sheet
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Incrementfor large-size sheet
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Table 4-10c
Guide to the table• Function
C: copy, P: print, S: scan• Color
4C: 4-color fullMONO: yellow, magenta, cyanBk: blackALL: 4C, MONO, and Bk
• Paper SizeL: large-size (larger than B4)S: small-size (B4 and smaller)M: both large and small
• Count at Duplexing¡: incremented by 1-: same as normal copying
• Count Increment for Large-Size Paper1: incremented by 12: incremented by 2
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-132
Codes and Cassette Paper Sizes
Table 4-11
Code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Code
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Notation
A1
A2
A3R
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B1
B2
B3
B4R
B4
B5R
B5
11x17
LTRR
LTR
STMT
STMTR
Notation
LGL
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
FGLI
FOLI
A-OFI
ALL
Paper
A1
A2
A3R
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B1
B2
B3
B4R
B4
B5R
B5
11x17
Letter-R
Letter
Statement
Statement-R
Paper
Legal
Korean Government
Korean Government R
Foolscap
Australian
Foolscap
Oficio
Ecuadorian Officio
Bolivian Officio
Argentine Letter
Argentine Letter-R
Government Letter
Government Letter-R
Argentine Legal
Government Legal
Folio
Argentine Officio
4-133
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
Projector-Related Items PRJ>OPTION
Level 3
BK-LIGHT(not used)
Remarks
0: do not indicate1: indicatedefault: 0
Description
Use it to enable or disable indication of a mode onthe User screen when copying positive film with aprotective sheet using back light BOX.
Editor-Related Items EDITOR>OPTION
Level 3
ED-MODE
Remarks
0: prohibit input1: 1-point input2: continuous input
Description
Use it to switch editor operation mode.
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-134
G. PG (test print)
COPIER>TEST Items
Level 1
TEST
Level 2
PG
Level 3
TYPE
TXPH
THRU
DENS-Y
DENS-M
DENS-C
DENS-K
COLOR-Y
COLOR-M
COLOR-C
COLOR-K
Description
use it to enter the type number of a test print, andpress the Copy Start key to start printing (00:normal copying)use it to switch the number of lines for test printing(0: 200 lines, 1: 400 lines, 2: 800 lines)use it to switch LUT for test printing (0: LUTpresent, 1: LUT absent)use it to adjust the Y density for TYPE=05 duringtest printing (0 to 255; a higher setting darkens theimage)use it to adjust the M density for TYPE=05 duringtest printing (0 to 255; a higher setting darkens theimage)use it to adjust the C density for TYPE=05 duringtest printing (0 to 255; a higher setting darkens theimage)use it to adjust the Bk density for TYPE=05 duringtest printing (0 to 255; a higher setting darkens theimage)use it to set the Y output for each TYPE (0: nooutput, 1: output)use it to set the M output for each TYPE (0: nooutput, 1: output)use it to set the C output for each TYPE (0: nooutput, 1: output)use it to set the Bk output for each TYPE (0: nooutput, 1: output)
4-135
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PG COPIER>TESTGenerates test prints.
Level 3
TYPE
TXPH
THRU
DENS-YDENS-MDENS-CDENS-K
COLOR-YCOLOR-MCOLOR-CCOLOR-K
Remarks
00: normal copyingSee Table 4-12.Be sure to set it back to '00' atthe end of test printing.
0: 200 lines1: 400 lines2: 800 lines
0: LUT present1: LUT absent
0 to 255
0: do not generate1: generate
You can generate no morethan one color.
Description
Use it to enter the type No. of a test print, and pressthe Copy Start key to start printing.
Use it to switch the number of lines used for testprinting.
Use it to switch LUT used for test printing.
Use it to set the output (each color) for each TYPE.• For example, to generate on M mono test print, set
COLOR-M to '1', and others to '0'.
Input Numbers and Test Prints
InputNo.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Description
image from CCD (normal copying)
for R&D
256 colors
256 gradations
16 gradations (17 gradations)
100% halftone
grid
for R&D
for R&D
for R&D
Table 4-12
InputNo.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
Description
MCYK horizontal stripes (laser FFactivation)
for R&D
MCYK 64 gradations
BGR64 gradations
full color 16 gradations (17 gradations)
full color light area 16 gradations (17gradations)
MCYK horizontal stripes (laser A0activation)
-
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-136
H. COUNTER (counter mode)
• You can check the number of times each mechanism has operated.
Resetting a Counter Reading1) Select an item to highlight.2) Press the Clear key on the control panel.
The counter will be reset to '00000000'.• Here, the notations "large-size" and "small-size" are used as follows:
large size covers B4 or larger sheetssmall size covers sheets smaller than B4.
4-137
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
COPIER>COUNTER Items
Level 1
COUNTER
Level 2
TOTAL
Level 3
SERVICE1SERVICE2TTLL-TTL
S-TTL
C-L-TTL
C-S-TTL
K-L-TTL
K-S-TTL
COPYL-COPYS-COPYC-L-COPYC-S-COPYK-L-COPYK-S-COPYPRINTL-PRINTS-PRINTC-L-PRINTC-S-PRINTK-L-PRINTK-S-PRINT4C-TTLY-COPYM-COPYC-COPYK-COPYPRJ
Description
total counter 1 for servicetotal counter 2 for servicetotal counter (copy + printer + synthesis)large-size copy total counter (copy+ printer +synthesis)small-size copy total counter (copy + printer +image synthesis)color large-size copy total counter (copy + print +synthesis)color small-size copy total counter (cop + print +synthesis)black large-size copy total counter (copy + print +synthesis)black small-size copy total counter (copy + print +synthesis)total copy counterlarge-size copy total countersmall-size copy total countercolor large-size copy total countercolor small-size coy total counterblack large-size copy total counterblack small-size copy total countertotal print counterlarge-size print total countersmall-size print total countercolor large-size print total countercolor small-size print total counterblack large-size print total counterblack small-size print total counterfull color (4 colors) copy total counterY mono copy counterM mono copy counterC mono copy counterBk mono copy counterprojector copy counter
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-138
SCANNER
PICK-UP
COLOR
FEEDER
JAM
MISC
SC-TTLSC-COPYSC-PRINT
C1L-C1S-C1C2L-C2S-C2C3L-C3S-C3MFL-MFS-MFDK2-SIDEL-2-SIDES-2-SIDE
Y-DEV
M-DEV
C-DEV
K-DEV
FEEDL-FEEDS-FEED
TOTALPRINTFEEDERSORTER
TOTALPWEFIX-WEB
PRI-CLN
P-ROLLER
STR-STPL
scanner total scan counterscan counter during copyingscan counter during printing
cassette 1 copy total countercassette 1 large size copy total countercassette 1 small-size copy total countercassette 2 copy total countercassette 2 large-size copy total countercassette 2 small-size copy total countercassette 3 copy total countercassette 3 large-size copy total countercassette 3 small-size copy total countmultifeeder copy total countermultifeeder large-size cop total countermultifeeder small-size copy total counterpaper deck coy total counter2nd side pickup total counterlarge-size 2nd side pickup total counter2nd side small-size pickup total counter
number of locking operations (Y developingassembly)number of locking operations (M developingassembly)number of locking operations (C developingassembly)number of locking operations (Bk developingassembly)
feeder copy total countfeeder large-size copy total counterfeeder small-size copy total counter
copier copy jam total countercopier print jam total counterfeeder print jam total countersorter print jam total counter
length of power supply timecounter for fixing cleaning belt (initially, '2,000'; thecount is decreased by '1' each time the cleaning beltsolenoid turns on after the warning for the belt hasbeen issued)primary charge wire auto cleaning counter (initially,2000; -4 per full color copy, -1 per mono color copy)polishing roller cleaning counter (initially, 1000; -1per copy)stapling counter for the stapler sorter
Cont'd
4-139
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PERIODEC
DURABLE
OZ-FIL2OZ-FIL5OZ-FIL6AR-FIL1AR-FIL3AR-FIL14AR-FIL15TN-FIL5TN-FIL6
CLN-BLDCL-SUPSBS-SL-FBS-SL-RCL-SUPS2SCN-LMPPRM-GRIDPR-CLN-U
PR-CLN-L
M-PU-RL
M-FD-RL
M-SP-RL
ATT-SCRP
WST-TNRCL-SFL-F
CL-SFL-R
FX-WEB-U
FX-WEB-L
PRM-WIRE
TR-WIRE
SP-WIRE
ITL-WIRE
EXL-WIRE
CL-WRE
CLN-BLD2ATT-BRUTR-BRUTRD-CLNK-ROLL
ozone filter fan (FM2) drive period (in sec)ozone filter fan (FM5) drive period (in sec)ozone filter fan (FM6) drive period (in sec)air filter fan (FM1) drive period (in sec)air filter fan (FM3) drive period (in sec)air filter fan (FM4) drive period (in sec)air filter fan (FM15) drive period (in sec)toner filter fan FM5) drive period (in sec)toner filter fan (FM6) drive period (in sec)
cleaning blade use period (in sec)cleaner scoop-up sheet use period (in sec)side seal front use period (in sec)side seal rear use period (in sec)No. 2 scoop-up sheet use period (in sec)scanning lamp activation period (in sec)grid plate high voltage activation period (in sec)primary charging wire cleaning pad (upper)execution (number of operations)primary charging wire cleaning pad (lower)execution (number of operations)manual feed pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)manual feed feed roller paper passage (number ofsheet)manual feed separation roller paper passage (numberof sheets)attraction roller scraper paper passage (number ofsheets)waste toner case paper passage (number of sheets)drum cleaner end felt (front) paper passage (numberof sheets)drum cleaner end felt (rear) paper passage (numberof sheets)fixing cleaning belt (upper) take-up (number ofoperations)fixing cleaning belt (lower) take-up (number ofoperations)primary charging wire high voltage activation period(in sec)transfer charging wire high voltage activation period(in sec)separation charging wire high voltage activationperiod (in sec)internal static eliminator charging wire high voltageactivation period (in sec)external static eliminator charging wire high voltageactivation period (in sec)post-cleaning charging wire high voltage activationperiod (in sec)No. 2 cleaning blade use period (in sec)attraction brush unit use period (in sec)transfer blade unit use period (in sec)transfer drum cleaner use period (in sec)polishing roller use period (in sec)
Cont'd
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
4-140
TR-SHEETSP-PU-RL
FX-UP-RLFX-LW-RLOIL-APFDP-PU-RL
DP-FD-RL
DP-SP-RL
D-PFRL-F
D-PFRL-R
OIL-APBLFHTR-UFHTR-LPRE-LMPPRM-UNIT
SP-UNIT
INT-UNIT
EXT-UNIT
CLR-UNIT
C1-PU-RL
C2-PU-RL
C3-PU-RL
C1-SP-RL
C2-SP-RL
C3-SP-RL
C1-FD-RL
C2-FD-RL
C3-FD-RL
DV-UNT-YDV-UNT-MDV-UNT-CDV-UNT-KPD-PU-RL
PD-FD-RL
transfer drum sheet paper passage (number of sheets)separation push-up roll paper passage (number ofsheets)fixing upper roller paper passage (number of sheets)fixing lower roller paper passage (number of sheets)oil applying felt use period (in sec)duplexing pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)duplexing feed roller paper passage (number ofsheets)duplexing separation roller paper passage (number ofsheets)duplexing paper feed roller (front) paper passage(number of sheets)duplexing paper feed roller (rear) paper passage(number of sheets)oil applying blade use period (in sec)fixing heater (upper) drive period (in sec)fixing heater (lower) drive period (in sec)pre-exposure lamp activation period (in sec)primary charging assembly high voltage activationperiod (in sec)separation charging assembly high voltage activationperiod (in sec)internal static eliminator high voltage activationperiod (in sec)external static eliminator high voltage activationperiod (in sec)post-cleaning charging assembly high voltage period(in sec)cassette 1 pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 2 pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 3 pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 1 separation roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 2 separation roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 3 separation roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 1 feed roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 2 feed roller paper passage (number ofsheets)cassette 3 feed roller paper passage (number ofsheets)Y developing assembly rotation period (in sec)M developing assembly rotation period (in sec)C developing assembly rotation period (in sec)Bk developing assembly rotation period (in sec)paper deck pickup roller paper passage (number ofsheets)paper deck feed roller paper passage (number ofsheets)
Cont'd
4-141
CHAPTER 4 SERVICE MODE
PD-SP-RL
FX-IN-BS
paper deck separation roller paper passage (numberof sheets)fixing insulating bush paper passage (number ofsheets)
5-1
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
A. Copier
The R-CPU and the DC-CPU of the copier's CPU PCB are equipped with a self diagnosticmechanism to check the state of the machine (particularly, the condition of sensors). Themechanism runs checks as needed, and indicates a code on the control panel when it finds a fault.
The tables that follow show codes and timing of detection, the latter with discussions of detailcodes indicated in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM/ERR).
Code Cause
The discussions that follow arecompiled according to detail code.
• The fixing thermistor is faulty.• The SSR is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The fixing thermistor is faulty.• The fixing heater (H1, H2) has an
open circuit.• The thermal switch (TP2, TP3) has
an open circuit.• The SSR is faulty.
Timing of detection
xx indicates a heater.xx=01: upper heaterxx=02: lower heater
xx01 The high temperaturedetection circuit on the DCdriver PCB has detectedoverheating (220°C or more)in the middle of the heater.
xx02 The thermistor (THM1/THM3) has detected 210°C.
xx04 The high temperaturedetection circuit on the DCdriver PCB has detectedoverheating on the ends of theheater (220°C or more).
xx05 The open-circuit detectioncircuit of the DC driver PCBhas determined that thedifference in temperature (asdetected by thermistors)between the middle and theend is 50°C or more.
xx21 The temperature does notincrease by 3°C or more in 4min at power-on (i.e., thetemperature of the fixingassembly is 100°C or less).
xx32 At power-on (i.e., thetemperature of the fixingassembly is 100°C or moreor 130°C or more), thetemperature does not increaseby 1°C or more in 2 min.
xx40 A temperature of 50°C orless has been detected for 1sec or more during standby.
xx50 A temperature of 50°C orless has been detected for 1sec or more during copying.
E000
5
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-2
Code
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
Cause
• The SSR1 has a short circuit.• The CPU PCB is faulty.• DC driver PCB is faulty.
• The cleaning belt inside the fixingassembly has been taken up for aspecific length.
• The fixing cleaning belt lengthsensor (PS11/PS67) is faulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The drawer connector of the fixingunit is faulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The fixing oil pump driver PCB isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The main motor (M4) is faulty.• The main motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The main motor driver PCB is
faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The drum motor (M2) is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The waste toner feedscrew lockdetecting switch (SW7) is faulty.
• The waste toner feedscrew isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
xx indicates a heater.xx=01: upper heaterxx=02: lower heater
xx03 The gate array of the DCdriver PCB has determinedthat SSR1 (for the fixingheater) is on for about 1.6 secor more even after the DC-CPU turned it off.
0100 As many as 2,000 copies havebeen made after the fixingupper cleaning belt lengthsensor detected the sensorlever and indicated a warningon the control panel.
0200 As many as 2,000 copies havebeen made after the fixinglower cleaning belt lengthsensor detected the sensorlever and indicated a warningon the control panel.
0000 During copying operation, theconnecton signal (CNCT*) forthe fixing assembly drawerconnector goes '1'.
0000 The fixing oil pump driverPCB does not generate thedrive signal even when thefixing oil pump drive signalhas been turned on.
0001 The fixing oil pump driver PCBgenerate the drive signal evenwhen the fixing oil pump drivesignal has been turned off.
The main motor ready signal(MNMRDY) is '0' for 1 sec or morewhile the main motor is rotating.
0001 Not used.
0002 The drum motor ready signal(DRMRDY) is '0' for 1 sec (4sec during deceleration) whilethe drum motor is rotating.
The waste toner feedscrew cannotrotate, and the waste toner feedscrewlock detecting switch has beenpressed.
E004
E005
E006
E010
E012
E013
E008
5-3
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The fixing motor (M5) is faulty.• The fixing motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The cleaning blade reciprocatingmotor (M7) is faulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The duplexing motor (M14) isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
The discussions that follow arecompiled according to detail code.
• The toner concentration sensor isfaulty.
• The developer inside thedeveloping assembly is not stirredproperly.
• The sensor is subjected to straylight (no cover, front cover open).
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
Timing of detection
0000 The motor lock signal(FXMLK) is '0' for 1 sec ormore while the fixing motor isrotating.
The cleaning blade reciprocatingmotor driver circuit on the DC driverPCB has detected an overcurrent for0.1 sec or more.
The duplexing motor clock signal(DUPMLK) is '0' for 1 sec or morewhile the duplexing motor isrotating.
Toner Concentration Faultxx indicates the color of a developingassembly.xx=00: MCYBk in commonxx=01: Mxx=02; Cxx=03: Yxx=04: Bk
The notations used herein means thefollowing:SGNL: toner concentration signalREF: concentration signalDENS: developer concentrationinside developing assemblySIGG: gain value for concentrationreference signalPT-REF: concentration referencesignal for photosensitive drumsurfacePT-STG-D: reflection light intensitysignal for photosensitive drumsurface
xx00 The connector is disconnectedor there is an open circuit; theREF or SGNL level is '50' orless
xx12 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), thevariation of SGNL-M/C/Ylevels for ten concentrationdata samplings is '70' or more.
E016
E017
E020
E014
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-4
Code Cause
• The toner concentration sensor isfaulty.
• The developer inside thedeveloping assembly is not stirredproperly.
• The sensor is subjected to straylight (no cover, front cover open).
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
Timing of detection
xx13 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), thevariation of REF-M/C/Ylevels for ten concentrationdata samplings is '70' or more.
xx16 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), thevariation of PT-SIG-M/C/Ylevels for 16 concentrationdata samplings is '102' ormore.
xx17 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), thevariation of PT-REF-M/C/Ylevels for 16 concentrationdata samplings is '70' or more.
xx20 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), theresult of averaging samplingsof SGNL-M/C/Y levels is'777' or less.
xx21 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), theresult of averaging samplingsof REF-M/C/Y levels is '200'or less.
xx23 At time of setting initial data(as during installation), theresult of averaging samplingsof PT-REF-M/C/Y levels is'777' or less.
E020
5-5
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The toner concentration sensor is faulty/soiled.
• The developer inside the developingassembly is not stirred properly.
• The sensor is subjected to stray light(no cover, front cover open).
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
• The toner concentration sensor is faulty.• The developer inside the developing
assembly is not stirred properly.• The sensor is subjected to stray light
(no cover, front cover open).• The photosensitive drum has
deteriorated.• The window of the toner concentration
sensor is soiled or scratched, or theprotective sheet is soiled.
• The photosensitive drum is soiled (e.g.,cleaning fault).
Timing of detection
xx24 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging five retrysamplings of PT-SIG-M/C/Y levels is '683' or lessor that of PT-SIG-Klevels is '305' or less.
xx30 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging samplings ofSGNL-M/C/Y levels is'859' or more.
xx31 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging samplings ofREF-M/C/Y levels is'930' or more.
xx32 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging the firstsampling of PT-SIG-M/C/Y levels is '930' ormore or that of PT-SIG-K levels is '550' or more.
xx33 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging samplings ofPT-REF-M/C/Y levels is'859' or more.
xx34 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), the result ofaveraging five retrysamplings of PT-SIG-M/C/Y levels is '749' ormore or that of PT-SIG-K levels is '371' or more.
E020
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-6
Code Cause
• The toner concentration sensor is faulty.• The developer inside the developing
assembly is not stirred properly.• The sensor is subjected to stray light (no
cover, front cover open).• The photosensitive drum has
deteriorated.• The window of the toner concentration
sensor is soiled or scratched, or theprotective sheet is soiled.
• The photosensitive drum is soiled (e.g.,cleaning fault).
The backup data on the CPU PCB isfaulty* or the initial settings have notbeen made.*Be sure to initialize the RAM of the DC-CPU and enter the values recorded on theservice label.
Timing of detection
xx40 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), gain settingcannot be performed (thelevel of SIGG-M/C/Y is'E0' or more or '20H' orless).
0441 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation), gain settingcannot be performed (thelevel of RGAIN-K is 'E0'or more or '20H' or less).
xx42 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation, gain settingcannot be performed (thelevel of SIGG-P-M/C/Y/K is '250' or more or '40'or less).
xx43 At time of setting initialdata (as duringinstallation, gain settingcannot be performed (thelevel of RGAN-P-M/C/Y/K is '250' or more or'40' or less).
xx50 During copyingsequence, gain settingcannot be performedbecause of an error in thememory backup data (thelevel of SIGG-M/C/Y is'E0' or more or '20H' orless).
0451 During copyingsequence, gain settingcannot be performedbecause of an error in thememory backup data (thelevel of RGAIN-K is 'E0'or more or '20H' or less).
xx52 During copyingsequence, gain settingcannot be performedbecause of an error in thememory backup data (thelevel of SIGG-P-M/C/Y/K is '250' or more or '40'or less).
E020
5-7
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
The backup data on the CPU PCB isfaulty* or the initial settings havenot been made.*Be sure to initialize the RAM ofthe DC-CPU and enter the valuesrecorded on the service label.
E020Timing of detection
xx53 During copying sequence,gain setting cannot beperformed because of an errorin the memory backup data(the level of RGAN-P-M/C/Y/K is '250' or more or '40' orless).
xx60 During copying sequence, thelevel of SGNL-M/C/Y setinitially is '777' or lessbecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx61 During copying sequence, thelevel of REF-M/C/Y setinitially is '200' or lessbecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx62 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-REF-M/C/Y setinitially is '777' or lessbecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx63 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-M/C/Y is'683' or less or that of PT-SIG-K is '305' or less because of anerror in the memory backupdata.
xx64 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-REF-D is '400' orless because of an error in thememory backup data.
xx65 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-D is '400' orless because of an error in thememory backup data.
xx66 During copying sequence, thelevel of D-M-TRGT/D-C-TRGT/D-Y-TRGT (developertarget value) is '700' or lessbecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx70 During copying sequence, thelevel of SGNL-M/C/Y setinitially is '859' or morebecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx71 During copying sequence, thelevel of REF-M/C/Y setinitially is '930' or morebecause of an error in thememory backup data.
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-8
Code Timing of detection
xx72 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-REF-M/C/Y/K setinitially is '859' or morebecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx73 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-M/C/Y setinitially is '749' or more orthat of PT-SIG-K is '371' ormore because of an error inthe memory backup data.
xx74 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-REF-D setinitially is '1000' or morebecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx75 During copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-D set initiallyis '1000' or more because ofan error in the memorybackup data.
xx76 During copying sequence, thelevel of D-M-TRGT/D-C-TRGT/D-Y-TRGT (developertarget value) is '930' or morebecause of an error in thememory backup data.
xx80 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of WINDOW-M/C/Y/K(window soiling correctioncoefficient) is '130%' or more.
xx81 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of WINDOW-M/C/Y/K(window soiling correctioncoefficient) is '70' or less.
xxA0 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of SGNL-M/C/Y is '306'or less.
xxA1 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of REF-M/C/Y setinitially decreases (intensity)by 30% or more.
xxA2 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-K is '51' orless.
E020Cause
The backup data on the CPU PCB isfaulty* or the initial settings havenot been made.*Be sure to initialize the RAM ofthe DC-CPU and enter the valuesrecorded on the service label.
The developer has deteriorated.• The developing cylinder fails to
rotate.• The developing assembly is not
locked.• The toner concentration (patch
detection) sensor is faulty.• The developer inside the
developing assembly is faulty.• The toner level sensor is faulty.• The concentration sensor is
subjected to stray light (no cover,front cover open).
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
5-9
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
E020Cause
The developer has deteriorated.• The developing cylinder fails to
rotate.• The developing assembly is not
locked.• The toner concentration (patch
detection) sensor is faulty.• The developer inside the
developing assembly is faulty.• The toner level sensor is faulty.• The concentration sensor is
subjected to stray light (no cover,front cover open).
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
• The developer has deteriorated.• The developing cylinder fails to rotate.• The developer is not locked.• The toner concentration sensor is
faulty.• The developer inside the
developing assembly is not stirredproperly.
• The toner level sensor is faulty.• The sensor is subjected to stray
light (no cover, front cover open).• The photosensitive drum has
deteriorated, or the toner levelsensor is faulty.
• The hopper motor is faulty.• The hopper motor has an open
circuit.
Timing of detection
xxB0 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of SGNL-M/C/Y is'1020' or more (when feeding10 sheets or morecontinuously).
xxB1 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of REF-M/C/Y setinitially increases (intensity)by '30%' or more.
xxB2 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of PT-SIG-M/C/Y is'1020' or more and that of PT-SIG-K is '550' or more.
xxC0 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of DENS-M/C/Y/K is'+3%' (when feeding 20 sheetscontinuously).
xxD0 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of DENS-M/C/Y/K is'+3%' (when feeding 20 sheetsor more continuously).
xxE0 When samplings are takenduring copying sequence, thelevel of DENS-M/C/Y/K hasexceeded '-5%'.
00FF After the hopper motor hasturned on, the hopper motorlock signal (HOPMLK) is '0'for 0.1 sec or more.
xxFF After the hopper motor hasturned on, the hopper motorlock signal (HOPMLK) is '0'for 0.1 sec or more (the tonersupply clutch is on).
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-10
Code Cause
• The developing locking motor(PM1, PM2, PM3, PM4) is faulty.
• The developing assembly HPsensor (PS49, PS51, PS53, PS55)is faulty.
• The developing locking driverPCB is faulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The jumper connector of J1050 onthe DC driver PCB isdisconnected.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.
• The lifter motor drive system issubjected to an overload.
• The lifter motor (M11, M12/DM12, M13/DM13, M15) isfaulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
0100 When the power switch is on,the M developing assemblyHP sensor is '0'.
0200 When the power switch is on,the C developing assemblyHP sensor is '0'.
0300 When the power switch is on,the Y developing assemblyHP sensor is '0'.
0400 When the power switch is on,the Bk developing assemblyHP sensor is '0'.
0101 When the developingassembly is locked, the Mdeveloping assembly HPsensor is '1'.
0201 When the developingassembly is locked, the Cdeveloping assembly HPsensor is '1'.
0301 When the developingassembly is locked, the Ydeveloping assembly HPsensor is '1'.
0401 When the developingassembly is locked, the Bkdeveloping assembly HPsensor is '1'.
A short circuit is detected in thecounter switching signal.
0001 When the cassette 1 liftermotor is on, an overcurrent isdetected in the motor.
0002 When the cassette 2 (forCLC1150, cassette 1) liftermotor is on, an overcurrent isdetected in the motor.
0003 When the cassette 3 (forCLC1150, cassette 2) liftermotor is on, an overcurrent isdetected in the motor.
0004 When the multifeeder liftermotor is on (lifter is movingup), an overcurrent is detectedin the motor.
0005 When the multifeeder liftermotor is on (lifter is movingdown), an overcurrent isdetected in the motor.
E021
E030
E040
5-11
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The deck lifter motor (M101) isfaulty.
• The deck lifter position sensor(PS104) is faulty.
• The deck lifter cable is broken.• The deck driver PCB is faulty.
• The duplexing paper jogging guidemotor (PM14) is faulty.
• The duplexing paper jogging guideHP sensor (PS40) is faulty.
• The duplexing driver PCB isfaulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The potential sensor is faulty.
• The pre-exposure lamp is faulty.
• The primary high-voltage output isfaulty.
• The grid bias is absent.
• The grid bias is not controlledproperly.
• The grid bias output is faulty.
• The post-cleaning charging outputis faulty.
• The laser emission is faulty.• The bending mirror is faulty.• The laser shutter is faulty.
Timing of detection
The deck lifter position sensorcannot detect the deck lifter evenwhen the deck lifter UP signal hasbeen kept on for a specific period oftime.
0000 The paper jogging guide HPsensor does not go '0' whenthe paper jogging motor hasbeen kept on for a specificperiod of time.
0001 The paper jogging guide HPsensor does not go '1' whenthe paper jogging guide motorhas been kept on for a specificperiod of time.
Potential Control-Related ErrorVdI: potential during initial rotationVd5: post-cleaning charging areaduring dark area attenuationpotential measurementVL5: area of Vd5 where chargeshave been removed by pre-exposurelampoffset value: value determined inservice mode(FUNCTION>DPC>OFST)xx indicates the color of adeveloping assembly.xx=01: Mxx=02: Cxx=03: Yxx=04: Bk
0000 The offset value is not 100 ±50.
0001 All Vd/VL is 10 V or less.
0010 VL5 is 100V or more.
0020 Vd1/Vd2/VdI is 30V or less.
0030 Vd1/Vd2/VdI is 100 V or less.
0031 VdI/Vd2/VdI is 900 V ormore.
0032 The difference between Vd1and Vd2 is 100 V or less.
0040 Vd5-Vd3 is 100 V or less.
0050 The difference between Vd1and VL1 is 30 V or less and,in addition, Vd1 is 350 V ormore; or, the differencebetween Vd2 and VL2 is 30 Vor less and, in addition, Vd2 is550 V or more.
E041
E050
E061
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-12
Code Cause
• The laser is faulty.
• The laser light is inadequate.• The bending mirror is faulty.• The laser shutter is faulty.
• The laser is faulty.
• The dark area potential attenuationis at the upper control limit.
• The grid bias is at the uppercontrol limit.
• The grid bias is at the lowercontrol limit.
• The developing bias is at the uppercontrol limit.
• The developing bias is at the lowercontrol limit.
• Vd1 is at the upper measurementlimit.
• The photosensitive drum hasdeteriorated.
• VL1 is at the upper measurementlimit.
• Vd2 is at the upper measurementlimit.
• VL2 is at the upper measurementlimit.
• Vd1 is at the lower measurementlimit.
• VL1 is at the lower measurementlimit.
• Vd2 is at the lower measurementlimit.
• VL2 is at the lower measurementlimit.
Timing of detection
0051 Vd1 is 300 V or less and, inaddition, Vd2 is 500 V or less.
0052 VL1 is 200 V or more and, inaddition, VL2 is 250 V ormore.
0053 Vd1 is 100 V or less and, inaddition, is 150 V or less.
0060 The dark are potentialattenuation value is 150 V ormore.
0070 The grid bias output value is900 V or more.
0071 The grid bias output value is100 V or less.
xx80 The developing bias outputvalue is 700 V or more.
xx81 The developing bias outputvalue is 200 V or less.
0090 Vd1 is 700 V or more.
0091 VL1 is 200 V or more.
0092 Vd2 is 850 V or more.
0093 VL2 is 250 V or more.
0094 Vd1 is 350 V or less.
0095 VL1 is 10 V or less.
0096 Vd2 is 550 V or less.
0097 VL2 is 50 V or less.
E061
5-13
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• SSR2 has a short circuit.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The separation charging assemblyis faulty.
• The internal/external staticeliminator is faulty.
• The HVT-AC PCB is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum is not locked
properly.• The DC driver PC is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
While the DC-CPU keeps thecassette heater/drum heater SSR2off, SSR2 is on.
An error signal (AC-ERR*=0) hasbeen generated by the HVT-PCB.
F000 The side A sensor, side Bsensor, or C sensor does notdetect the signal plate within10 sec after the operation tolock the transfer drum hasstarted.
0001 There is an error in the fallingedge timing of the signal platedetected by the side B sensor.
0002 There is an error in the risingedge timing of the signal platedetected by the side B sensor.
0003 There is an error in the risingedge timing of the signal platedetected by the C sensor.
0004 There is an error in the fallingedge timing of the single plateC detected by the C sensor.
0005 There is an error in the risingedge timing of the signal platedetected by the side A sensor.
0006 There is an error in the fallingedge timing of the signal platedetected by the side A sensor.
0007 There is an error in the risingedge timing of the signal plateD detected by the C sensor.
0008 There is an error in the fallingedge timing of the signal plateD detected by the C sensor.
1001 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is notgenerated after the fallingedge signal of the signal plateD detected by the C sensorhas been generated.
E062
E067
E071
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-14
Code Cause
• The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum locking
mechanism is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
1002 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is notgenerated after the rising edgesignal of the signal plate Cdetected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1003 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is notgenerated after the fallingedge of the signal platedetected by the side B sensorhas been generated.
1004 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is not detectedafter the rising edge of thesignal plate detected by theside B sensor has beengenerated.
1005 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side A sensor is notgenerated after the fallingedge of the signal plate Cdetected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1006 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side A sensor is notgenerated after the rising edgeof the signal plate D detectedby the C sensor has beengenerated.
1007 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate D to be detectedby the C sensor is notgenerated after the rising edgesignal of the signal platedetected by the side A sensorhas been generated.
1008 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate D to be detectedby the C sensor is notgenerated after the fallingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side A sensorhas been generated.
E071
5-15
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum locking
mechanism is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• Side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• Side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum is not locked
properly.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
1101 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the fallingedge signal of the signal plateD detected by the C sensorhas been generated.
1102 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the risingedge signal of the signal plateC detected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1103 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the fallingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side B sensorhas been generated.
1104 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the risingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side B sensorhas been generated.
1105 The rising edge of the signalplate to be detected by theside A sensor is generated 10ms earlier after the fallingedge signal of the signal plateC detected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1106 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side A sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the risingedge signal of the signal plateD detected by the C sensorhas been generated.
1107 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate D to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the risingedge of the signal l plate to bedetected by the side A sensorhas been generated.
E071
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-16
Code Cause
• Side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• Side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum is not locked
properly.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
1108 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate D to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms earlier after the fallingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side A sensorhas been generated.
1201 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is generated10 ms later after the fallingedge signal of the signal plateD detected by the C sensorhas been generated.
1202 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side B sensor is generated10 ms later after the risingedge signal of the signal plateC detected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1203 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms later after the fallingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side by side Bsensor has been generated.
1204 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate C to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms later after the risingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side B sensorhas been generated.
1205 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side A sensor is generated10 ms later after the fallingedge signal of the signal plateC detected by the C sensor hasbeen generated.
1206 The falling edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe side A senor is generated10 ms later after the risingedge signal of the single plateD detected by the C sensorhas been generated.
E071
5-17
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The side A sensor (PS2) is faulty.• The side B sensor (PS3) is faulty.• The C sensor (PS4) is faulty.• The signal plate is faulty.• The drum motor drive system is
subjected to an overload.• The transfer drum is not locked
properly.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The transfer drum cleaner brushmotor (M8) is faulty.
• The polishing roller motor (M9) isfaulty.
• The motor drive system issubjected to an overload.
• The attraction/transfer locking cammotor (PM7) is faulty.
• The attraction/transfer locking camHP sensor (PS8) is faulty.
• The registration path driver PCB isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
1207 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate D to be detectedby the C sensor is generated10 ms later after the risingedge signal of the signal platedetected by the side A sensorhas been detected.
1208 The rising edge signal of thesignal plate to be detected bythe C sensor is generated 10ms later after the falling edgesignal of the signal platedetected by the side A sensorhas been generated.
0002 The motor lock signal(TRCMLK) is '0' for 1 sec ormore while the transfer drumcleaner brush motor isrotating.
0003 An overcurrent is detected for1 sec or more while thepolishing roller motor isrotating.
0202 The attraction/transfer lookingcam HP sensor does not go '1'within 4 sec after theattraction/transfer lockingcam motor has started torotate.
E071
E072
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-18
Code Cause
• The transfer unit drawer connectoris faulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The transfer drum locking motor(PM5) is faulty.
• The transfer drum HP sensor(PS57) is faulty.
• The transfer locking driver PCB isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The transfer drum cleaner HPsensor (PS59) is faulty.
• The transfer locking driver PCB isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The laser unit is faulty.• The laser driver PCB is faulty.• The laser controller PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The laser scanner motor (M3) isfaulty.
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The laser controller unit (laserthermistor, laser heater, lasercontroller PCB) is faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The laser controller PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The connector of the DC driverPCB is disconnected.
• The DC fuse PCB is faulty (blownfuse).
• The DC driver PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
0001 During copying, the drawerconnect signal (FT-CNCT*)of the transfer unit lever is '1'.
0002 During copying operation, theconnection signal (TD-CNCT)of the drawer connector of thetransfer unit is '1'.
0003 During copying, the drawerconnect signal (CONNECT*)of the registration path unit is'1'.
0000 The transfer drum HP sensordoes not go '1' when thetransfer drum locking motorhas been kept on for a specificperiod of time.
0001 The transfer drum HP sensordoes not go '0' when thetransfer drum locking motorhas been kept on for a specificperiod of time.
0000 The transfer drum cleaner HPsensor does not go '1' whenthe transfer drum cleanerlocking motor has been kepton for a specific period oftime.
0001 The transfer drum cleaner HPsensor does not go '0' whenthe transfer drum cleanerlocking motor has been kepton for a specific period oftime.
The BD signal cannot be detectedfor 1 sec or more when potentialcontrol operation starts.
0000 The laser scanner motor readysignal (LSMRDY) is '1' for0.5 sec or more while the laserscanner motor is rotating.
0001 The laser heater temperaturehas exceeded 60°C.
0002 When the machine internaltemperature is 20°C ormore, the laser heater doesnot reach a specifictemperature within 20 min.
An error has occurred while wiringdata to the laser controller PCB fromthe CPU PCB at power-on.
0000 At powe-on, a read/write erroroccurred in the register of theDC driver PCB.
E073
E074
E079
E100
E110
E120
E190
E191
5-19
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code
No code indication;keys are disabled.
Cause
• The original scanner HP sensor(PS1) is faulty.
• The original scanner motor(PM15) is faulty.
• The original scanner motor driverPCB is faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The DC power supply to theoriginal scanner motor driver PCBis faulty.
• The wiring or connectors arefaulty.
• The original scanner motor driverPC is faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The scanning is faulty.• The lamp regulator PCB is faulty.
• The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty.• The IP-PRJ PCB is faulty.• The IP-ED PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
The original scanner home positionsignal (SCHP) is not generatedwithin 10 sec after the power switchhas been turned on or the Copy Startkey has been pressed.
The communication between theoriginal scanner driver PCB and theCPU PCB is interrupted or 5 sec ormore.
During standby, the scanning lampturns on even though the R-CPUkeeps the scanning lamp ON signaloff.During copying, the scanning lampturns off even though the R-CPUkeeps the scanning lamp ON signalon.
At power-on, RAM access withinthe IP-MAIN PCB does not takeplace normally.RAM access within the IP-PRJ PCBor IP-ED PCB does not take placenormally. (For E305, the code isindicated when copying is started inprojector mode or area select mode.)
0001 BD error (same as E100)
0002 concentration conversionRAM error
0004 B shading correction RAMerror
0008 G shading correction RAMerror
0010 R shading correction RAMerror
0020 color correction RAM error
0040 original scanner motor error
0100 IP-ED PCB RAM error ordisconnection
0400 IP-PRJ PCB RAM error ordisconnection
0800 IP-IF PCB RAM error
1000 IP-IF PCB RAM error
(E202)
E208
E220
E305
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-20
Code Cause
• The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty.• The IP-ECO PCB is faulty.• The connection between IP-
MAIN, IP-ECO PCB, and laserdriver PCB is faulty.
• The IP-ED PCB is faulty.• The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty.
• The projector lamp is faulty.• The projector thermal switch is
faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.• The DC power supply is faulty.
• An error has occurred inconjunction with the copy datacontroller/remote diagnosis device.
• The IP-PRJ PCB is faulty.• The IP-MAIN PCB is faulty.• The projector controller PCB is
faulty.
• The wiring is faulty.• The coin vendor is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The power switch is faulty.• The DC harness is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.
• The 24V output is faulty.• The DC power cut relay is faulty.• The DC fuse PCB is faulty.• The CPU PCB is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.
• The operation of a fan (indicatedby detail code) is faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
The IP-ECO PCB and the IP-MAINPCB are not connected.The IP-ECO PCB and its ROM are apoor match.
The communication between IP-ED-PCB and IP-MAIN PCB isinterrupted for 5 sec or more.
The LAOFF signal remains '0' whenthe projector controller PCB turnson the LCNT signal.
The communication between theDC-CPU and the R-CPU on theCPU PCB is interrupted for 5 sec ormore.
The copy data controller or theremote diagnostic device has beenphysically detached.
The communication between theprojector controller PCB and the IP-MAIN PCB is interrupted for 5 secor more.
0000 The communication betweenthe coin vendor and the CPUPCB is disrupted.
An open circuit has been detected inthe auto shut-off signal.
0000 During copying operation, theCPU does not detect a 24Voutput for about 5 sec whenthe transfer unit lever switch,front left door switch, anddelivery door switch areclosed.
0001 The electrical unit fan (FM8)has stopped to rotate in error.
0002 The IP cooling fan (FM7) hasstopped to rotate in error.
0003 The exhaust fan (FM2) hasstopped to rotate in error.
0004 The ozone suction fan (FM5)has stopped to rotate in error.
0005 The toner suction fan (FM6)has stopped to rotate in error.
0006 The laser scanner motorcooling fan (FM4) hasstopped to rotate in error.
0008 The primary chargingassembly fan (FM3) hasstopped to rotate in error.
E351
E620
E634
E700
E717
E718
E800
E803
E804
E719
5-21
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
Code Cause
• The operation of a fan (indicatedby detail code) is faulty.
• The CPU PCB is faulty.• The DC driver PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
000A The back suction fan (FM16)has stopped to rotate in error.
000B The power supply cooing fan1/2 (FM9/FM13) has stoppedin error.
000C The power supply cord basefan (FM17) has stopped torotate in error.
0102 The original exposure systemcooling fan 2/3 (FM14/FM15)has stopped to rotate in error.
E804
Caution:1. The copier may be reset by turning its power switch off and then on when its self
diagnostic mechanism has turned on. This, however, does not apply to E000, E005, E008,E020 (if xxE0), E717 or E719. This is to prevent possible damage by an overheating fixingroller occurring if these errors were designed to be reset while the thermistor has an opencircuit.
2. The fixing cleaning belt counter (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB in servicemode) is cleared when the fixing cleaning belt is replaced.
3. 'E004' is indicated on the control panel for about 1.6 sec when the error occurs: thereafter,the power switch wil be disabled (i.e., error auto power-off is activated).If such is the case, turn on the power switch while the left front cover is open. The errorcode may be checked by COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR in service mode.
Resetting E000, E005, E008, E020, E717, or E7191) Start service mode, and select COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR (to highlight).2) Press the OK key.3) Turn off and then on the power switch.
E717E717 may be prevented by temporarily disconnecting the communication line using service
mode as follows before disconnecting the copy data controller or the remot diagnostic deviceconnected to the copier:1) Start service mode, and select COPIER>OPTION>IN-FACE>B-CLR (to highlight).2) Enter '0', and press the OK key.3) End service mode, and perform appropriate servicing.
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-22
B. RDF
Note:If the self diagnostic mechanism has turned on, you can reset the machine by turning thecopier's power switch off and then on.If you want to continue to make copies while the RDF is out of order, place the original on thecopyboard glass after lifting the RDF.
Code Cause
• The communication of data withthe copier is faulty.
• The pickup motor (M1) is faulty.• The pickup roller home position
sensor 1 (S8) is faulty.
• The belt motor (M3) is faulty.• The belt motor clock sensor (S11)
is faulty.
• The reversal motor (M2) is faulty.• The slip sensor (S10) is faulty.
• The delivery motor (M5) is faulty.• The delivery motor clock sensor
(S12) is faulty.
• The pickup motor (M1) is faulty.• The pickup motor clock sensor
(S12) is faulty.
• The tray drive motor (M6) isfaulty.
• The tray position sensor (S25) isfaulty.
• The feeder motor (M8) is faulty.• The tray position sensor (S25) is
faulty.
• The registration sensor 1 (S3) isfaulty.
• The skew sensor 1 (S4) is faulty.• The manual feed registration
sensor (S19) is faulty.• The image leading edge sensor
(S20) is faulty.• The original sensor 1 (S7) is
faulty.
Timing of detection
The communication is monitored atall times, and it is interrupted for 5sec or more.
The state of the sensor remainsunchanged after the pickup motorhas been driven for 2 sec or more.
The number of belt motor clockpulses is lower than a specific valuefor 100 msec.
The number of slip clock pulses islower than a specific value for 100msec.
The number of delivery motor clockpulses is lower than a specific valuefor 200 msec.
The number of pickup motor clockpulses is lower than a specific valuefor 200 msec.
The state of the sensor remainsunchanged after the tray drive motorhas been driven for 2 sec or more.
The number of feed motor clockpulses is lower than a specific valuefor 100 msec.
The output of each sensor is aspecific value or more in the absenceof paper.
E400
E401
E402
E403
E404
E405
E407
E408
E411
5-23
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
C. Sorter
Code Cause
• The feed motor (M1) fails torotate.
• The low-speed feed motor (M10)fails to rotate.
• The home position of the bufferpath unit locking cam cannot bedetected.
• The push bar motor (M7) fails torotate.
• The reference wall motor (M6)fails to rotate.
• The multi guide motor (M5) failsto rotate.
• The bin internal paper sensor 1(S3, S4) auto adjustmentmechanism is faulty.
• The bin internal paper sensor 2(S6, S7) auto adjustmentmechanism is faulty.
• The guide bar motor (M8) fails torotate.
• The stapler unit drive motor (M4)fails to rotate.
Timing of detection
The clock signal from the feedmotor clock sensor (PI5) is absentfor 250 msec.
The clock signal from the feedmotor clock sensor (PI23) is absentfor 250 msec or more.
The home position cannot bedetected within a specific period oftime (varying from copier to copier)after the Copy Start key has beenpressed.
The operation fails to end within2000 msec after the motor drivesignal has been generated.
The operation does not end within2000 msec after the motor drivesignal has been generated.
The operation does not end within2000 msec after the motor drivesignal has been generated.
The auto adjustment mechanism ofthe bin internal paper sensor 1 (S3,S4) fails, or an error occurs in theauto adjustment value.
The auto adjustment mechanism ofthe bin internal paper sensor 2 (S6,S7) fails, or an error occurs in theauto adjustment value.
The operation does not end within aspecific period of time after themotor drive signal has beengenerated.• for front access, 5000 msec• except front access, 2000 msec
The operation does not end within2000 msec after the motor drivesignal output has been generated.The clock signal from the motorclock sensor (PI8) is absent for 250msec or more.The input signal from the swinghome position sensor (PI9) remainsunchanged for 1000 msec.
E510
E516
E517
E522
E523
E524
E525
E526
E530
E531
CHAPTER 5 SELF DIAGNOSIS
5-24
Code Cause
• The stapler unit shift motor (M3)fails to rotate.
• The stapler internal paper sensorauto adjustment mechanism isfaulty.
• The bin shift motor (M9) fails torotate.
• The DC output from the sortercontroller PCB is faulty.
Timing of detection
The operation does not end within5000 msec after the motor drivesignal has been generated.
The auto adjustment mechanism ofthe stapler internal paper sensorfails, or an error occurs in the autoadjustment value.
The operation fails to end within aspecific period of time after themotor drive signal has beengenerated.• for initialization, 20000 msec• except initialization, 2000 msecThe clock plate sensor of the motordoes not generate clock signals for250 msec.The input signal from the lead camposition sensor (PI20) remainsunchanged for 2000 msec.
An error has occurred in the DCoutput (24 VL, 24 VP) from thesorter controller PCB.
E532
E533
E540
E550
A-1
12
34
56
78
12
34
56
78
12
34
12
34
56
78
WM
UP
AIN
TR
ST
BY
DSRD
YIN
TRC
OP
YLS
TR
ST
BY
130o C
158o C
CO
PY S
TAR
T KE
Y O
NPO
WER
SW O
N
163o C
MC
YK
MC
YK
MC
YK
MM
CC
YY
KK
MM
CC
YY
KK
[2]
[1]
158o C
Pho
tose
nsiti
ve d
rum
revo
lutio
n
Tran
sfer
dru
m r
evol
utio
n
Sid
e A
sen
sor
(PS
2)
Sid
e B
sen
sor
(PS
3)
Mai
n m
otor
(M
4)
Dru
m m
otor
(M
2)
Fix
ing
heat
er
Orig
inal
sca
nner
mot
or(M
P15
)
Sca
nnin
g la
mp
(LA
2)
Pic
kup
mot
or (
DP
M11
)
Cas
sette
1 p
icku
p so
leno
id(D
SL8
)
Cas
sette
1 p
icku
p cl
utch
(DC
L12)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n m
otor
2(P
M8)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n m
otor
1(P
M9)
Reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
(P
S70
)
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
(C
L9)
Reg
istr
atio
n ro
ller
lock
ing/
unlo
ckin
g so
leno
id (
SL9
)
Attr
actio
n ro
ller
sole
noid
(SL9
)
Attr
actio
n hi
gh-v
olta
geou
tput
Pre
-exp
osur
e la
mp
(LA
1)
Pos
t-cl
eani
ng h
igh-
volta
geou
tput
Prim
ary
/ grid
hig
h-vo
ltage
outp
ut
Lase
rD
evel
opin
g as
sem
bly
lock
ing
mot
or
Dev
elop
ing
cylin
der
clut
ch
Dev
elop
ing
bias
Tran
sfer
hig
h-vo
ltage
out
put
Sep
arat
ion
high
-vol
tage
outp
ut
Inte
rnal
/ext
erna
l sta
tic e
lim-
inat
or h
igh-
volta
ge o
utpu
t
Sep
arat
ion
roll
push
-up
sole
noid
(S
L3)
Sep
arat
ion
claw
sol
enoi
d(S
L4)
Sep
arat
ion
sens
or (
PS
7)
Fix
ing
mot
or (
M5)
Fix
ing
clea
ning
bel
t sol
enoi
d
Inte
rnal
del
iver
y se
nsor
(PS
12)
Tran
sfer
dru
m lo
ckin
g m
otor
(PM
5)
Tran
sfer
dru
m c
lean
erlo
ckin
g m
otor
(P
M6)
Tran
sfer
dru
m c
lean
erbr
ush
mot
or (
M8)
Hop
per
mot
or
Tone
r su
pply
clu
tch
Cle
aner
rec
ipro
catin
g m
otor
(M7)
Cou
nter
AP
PE
ND
IX
A.
Gen
eral
Tim
ing
Cha
rt
A-2
12
34
56
78
12
34
56
78
ST
BY
DSRD
YIN
TRC
OP
YLS
TR
ST
BY
2nd
CO
PY S
TAR
T KE
Y O
N MC
YK
MC
YK
MC
YK
MM
CC
YY
KK
MM
CC
YY
KK
[2]
[1]
158o C
12
34
56
78
12
34
56
78
[1]
MC
YK
MC
YK
MC
YK
MM
CC
YY
KK
MM
CC
YY
KK
[2]
DSRD
YIN
TRC
OP
YLS
TR
1st
C
OPY
STA
RT
KEY
ON
Pho
tose
nsiti
ve d
rum
revo
lutio
n
Tran
sfer
dru
m r
evol
utio
n
Sid
e A
sen
sor
(PS
2)
Sid
e B
sen
sor
(PS
3)
Mai
n m
otor
(M
4)
Dru
m m
otor
(M
2)
Fix
ing
heat
er
Sca
nner
mot
or (
MP
M15
)
Sca
nnin
g la
mp
(LA
2)
Pic
kup
mot
or (
DP
M11
)
Cas
sette
1 p
icku
p so
leno
id(D
SL8
)
Cas
sette
1 p
icku
p cl
utch
(DC
L12)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n m
otor
2(P
M8)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n m
otor
1(P
M9)
Reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
(PS
70)
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
(C
L9)
Reg
istr
atio
n ro
ller
lock
ing/
unlo
ckin
g so
leno
id (
SL9
)
Attr
actio
n ro
ller
sole
noid
(SL9
)
Attr
actio
n hi
gh-v
olta
geou
tput
Pre
-exp
osur
e la
mp
(LA
1)
Pos
t-cl
eani
ng h
igh-
volta
geou
tput
Prim
ary
/ grid
hig
h-vo
ltage
outp
ut
Lase
r
Dev
elop
ing
lock
ing
mot
or
Dev
elop
ing
cylin
der
clut
ch
Dev
elop
ing
bias
Tran
sfer
hig
h-vo
ltage
out
put
Sep
arat
ion
high
-vol
tage
outp
ut
Inte
rnal
/ext
erna
l hig
h-vo
ltage
outp
ut
Sep
arat
ion
roll
push
-up
sole
noid
(S
L3)
Sep
arat
ion
claw
driv
eso
leno
id (
SL4
)
Sep
arat
ion
sens
or (
PS
7)
Fix
ing
mot
or (
M5)
Fix
ing
clea
ning
bel
t sol
enoi
d
Inte
rnal
del
iver
y se
nsor
(PS
12)
Dup
lexi
ng m
otor
(M
14)
Re-
pick
up m
otor
(P
M13
)
Del
iver
y pa
per
defle
ctin
gso
leno
id (
SL1
0)
Del
iver
y ve
rtic
al p
ath
clut
ch(C
L19)
Sta
ckin
g gu
ide
plat
e so
leno
id(S
L15)
Dup
lexi
ng p
icku
p as
sem
bly
stop
per
plat
e so
leno
id (
SL1
2)
Dup
lexi
ng p
icku
p as
sem
bly
feed
rol
ler
sole
noid
(S
L13)
Dup
lexi
ng fe
ed c
lutc
h (C
L14)
Re-
pick
up c
lutc
h (C
L15)
Pap
er jo
ggin
g gu
ide
mot
or(P
M4)
pape
r jo
ggin
g gu
ide
HP
sens
or (
PS
40)
Tran
sfer
dru
m lo
ckin
g m
otor
PN
5)
Tran
sfer
dru
m c
lean
erlo
ckin
g m
otor
PM
6)
Tran
sfer
dru
m c
lean
er b
rush
mot
or (
M8)
Hop
per
mot
or
Tone
r su
pply
clu
tch
Cle
aner
ass
embl
y re
cipr
oca-
ting
mot
or (
M7)
Cou
nter
A-3
APPENDIX
400* LASER SELECT commandAC-ERR* HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AC ERROR signalACSBY AC STANDBY commandAITOP A-SIDE SENSOR signalAPCHOLD AUTO POWER CONTROL HOLD commandBD BEAM DETECT signalBITOP B-SIDE SENSOR signalBK-REF BK-REFERENCE signalBK-SGNL BK-TONER DENSITY signalBKTEP BK-TONER EMPTY signalBLRMA ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE CAM MOTOR commandBLRMA* ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE CAM MOTOR commandBLRMB ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE CAM MOTOR commandBLRMB* ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE CAM MOTOR commandBLRMHL ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE CAM MOTOR
HOLD commandBLRMHP ATTRACTION/TRANSFER PRESSURE
CAM HOME POSITION SENSOR signalC-REF C-REFERENCE signalC-SGNL C-TONER DENSITY signalC1LFD CASSETTE-1 LIFTER SENSOR signalC1LFMON CASSETTE-1 LIFTER MOTOR ON commandC1PAD CASSETTE-1 PAPER SENSOR signalC1PLVR CASSETTE-1 PAPER LEVEL VR signalC1PUCL CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP CLUTCH commandC1PUMA CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC1PUMA* CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC1PUMB CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC1PUMB* CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC1PUMHL CASSETTE-1 PICK-UP MOTOR HOLD commandC2LFD/D1LFD CASSETTE-2/1 LIFTER SENSOR signalC2LFMON CASSETTE-2/1 LIFTER MOTOR ON commandC2PAD/D1PAD CASSETTE-2/1 PAPER SENSOR signalC2PLVR/D1PLVR CASSETTE-2/1 PAPER LEVEL VR signalC2PUCL/D1PUCL CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP CLUTCH commandC2PUMA/D1PUMA CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC2PUMA*/D1PUMA* CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC2PUMB/D1PUMB CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC2PUMB*/D1PUMB* CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC2PUMHL/D1PUMHL CASSETTE-2/1 PICK-UP MOTOR HOLD commandC2PWVR CASSETTE-2 PAPER WIDTH VR signalC2SZ0 CASSETTE-2 PAPER LENGTH SENSOR signal 0C2SZ1 CASSETTE-2 PAPER LENGTH SENSOR signal 1C3LFD/D2LFD CASSETTE-3/2 LIFTER SENSOR signalC3LFMON CASSETTE-3/2 LIFTER MOTOR ON commandC3PAD/D2PAD CASSETTE-3/2 PAPER SENSOR signalC3PLVR/D2PLVR CASSETTE-3/2 PAPER LEVEL VR signal
B. Signals and Abbreviations
1. Signals
APPENDIX
A-4
C3PUCL/D1PUCL CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP CLUTCH commandC3PUMA/D2PUMA CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC3PUMA*/D2PUMA* CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC3PUMB/D2PUMB CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC3PUMB*/D2PUMB* CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP MOTOR commandC3PUMHL/D2PUMHL CASSETTE-3/2 PICK-UP MOTOR HOLD commandC3PWVR/D2PWVR CASSETTE-3/2 PAPER WIDTH VR signalC3SZ0/D3SZ0 CASSETTE-3/2 PAPER SENSOR signal 0C3SZ1/D3SZ1 CASSETTE-3/2 PAPER SENSOR signal 1CBRCMA CLEANER BLADE RECIPROCATING MOTOR command ACBRCMB CLEANER BLADE RECIPROCATING MOTOR command BCDEVA C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGINGCDEVA* C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR command CCDEVB C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR command CCDEVB* C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR command CCDEVCL C-DEVELOPING CYLINDER CLUTCH command CCDEVHL C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING C MOTOR HOLDcommandCDEVHP C-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY HOME POSITION SENSOR signal CCITOP C SENSOR signalCTEP C-TONER EMPTY signalCTNRSUP* C-TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH commandDCFMERR POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN ERROR signalDELFLSL* DELIVERY PAPER DEFLECTOR SOLENOID commandDINPD DUPLEXING UNIT INLET PAPER SENSOR signalDJGHP PAPER JOGGING GUIDE HOME POSITION SENSOR signalDJOGMA DUPLEXING UNIT PAPER JOGGING GUIDE MOTOR commandDJOGMA* DUPLEXING UNIT PAPER JOGGING GUIDE MOTOR commandDJOGMB DUPLEXING UNIT PAPER JOGGING GUIDE MOTOR commandDJOGMB* DUPLEXING UNIT PAPER JOGGING GUIDE MOTOR commandDLCOVD DELIVERY COVER OPEN SENSOR signalDLFMERR DELIVERY COOLING FAN ERROR signalDLFMON DELIVERY COOLING FAN ON commandDLVP1D DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH-1 SENSOR signalDLVP2D DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH-2 SENSOR signalDREPD DUPLEXING UNIT REVERSAL PAPER SENSOR signalDRHERR DRUM HEATER ERROR signalDRHOFF DRUM HEATER OFF commandDRMCLK DRUM MOTOR CLOCK signalDRMCW DRUM MOTOR ROTATIONAL DIRECTION signalDRMFG DRUM MOTOR FG signalDRMON DRUM MOTOR ON commandDRMRDY DRUM MOTOR READY signalDRMSP0 DRUM MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal 0DRMSP1 DRUM MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal 1DUPFDCL* DUPLEXING UNIT FEEDER CLUTCH commandDUPMLK DUPLEXING UNIT MOTOR LOCK signalDUPMON DUPLEXING UNIT MOTOR commandDUPPFSL* DUPLEXING UNIT PAPER FEEDING ROLLER SOLENOID commandDUPPPD DUPLEXING UNIT PATH PAPER SENSOR signalDUPSAPD DUPLEXING UNIT TRAY PAPER SENSOR signalDUPUMA DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP MOTOR commandDUPUMA* DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP MOTOR command
A-5
APPENDIX
DUPUMB DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP MOTOR commandDUPUMB* DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP MOTOR commandDUPUMHL DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP MOTOR HOLD commandDVERPCL DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH CLUTCH commandENDPLSL* DUPLEXING UNIT STACK GUIDE SOLENOID commandEXFMERR EXHAUST FAN ERROR signalEXFMON EXHAUST FAN ON commandFDC1D CASSETTE-1 OPEN SENSOR signalFDC2D/FDD1D CASSETTE-2/1 OPEN SENSOR signalFDC3D/FDD2D CASSETTE-3/2 OPEN SENSOR signalFDCOVD PICK-UP ASSEMBLY COVER OPEN SENSOR signalFXMLK FIXING MOTOR LOCK signalFXMON FIXING MOTOR ON commandFXMSP0 FIXING MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal 0FXMSP1 FIXING MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal 1FXOILD FIXING OIL LEVEL SENSOR signalGGUIDSL ATTRACTION ROLLER SOLENOID commandHOPMCW HOPPER MOTOR ROTATIONAL DIRECTION signalHOPMLK HOPPER MOTOR LOCK signalHOPMON HOPPER MOTOR ON commandHUM ENVIRONMENT SENSOR HUMIDITY signalHVATC ATTRACTION CORONA CURRENT ON/OFF CONTROL signalHVATI ATTRACTION CORONA CURRENT LEVEL CONTROL signalHVCC POST-CLEANING CORONA ON/OFF CONTROL signalHVCI POST-CLEANING CORONA LEVEL CONTROL signalHVGI GRID BIAS LEVEL CONTROL signalHVGIC GRID BIAS ON/OFF commandHVIDCC INTERNAL STATIC ELIMINATOR DC ON/OFF
CONTROL signalHVIDCI INTERNAL STATIC ELIMINATOR DC LEVEL
CONTROL signalHVIOC EXTERNAL/INTERNAL STATIC
ELIMINATOR AC ON/OFF CONTROL signalHVPR PRIMARY CURRENT ON/OFF commandHVTRC TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT ON/OFF CONTROL signalHVTRI TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT LEVEL CONTROL signalINDELD INSIDE DELIVERY PAPER SENSOR signalIPFMERR IP COOLING FAN ERROR signalIPFMON IP COOLING FAN ON commandITOP IMAGE LEADING EDGE signalKDEVA BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR BK commandKDEVA* BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR BK commandKDEVB BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR BK commandKDEVB* BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR BK commandKDEVCL BK-DEVELOPING CYLINDER CLUTCH commandKDEVHL BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR HOLD commandKDEVHP BK-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY HOME POSITION SENSOR signalKEYSW* KEY SWITCH signalKTNRSUP* BK-TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH commandL-ON LASER ON commandL-RDY LASER READY commandLCOVD LEFT COVER OPEN SENSOR signalLFRCWD LOWER FIXING ROLLER CLEANING WEB SENSOR signal
APPENDIX
A-6
LHON LOWER FIXING HEATER ON commandLSMCLK LASER SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK signalLSMON LASER SCANNER MOTOR commandLSMRDY LASER SCANNER MOTOR READY signalLTHM3 LOWER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE 3 signalLTHM4 LOWER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE 4 signalLWEBSL LOWER CLEANING WEB SOLENOID commandM-REF M-REFERENCE signalM-SGNL M-TONER DENSITY signalMDEVA M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandMDEVA* M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandMDEVB M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandMDEVB* M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandMDEVCL M-DEVELOPING CYLINDER CLUTCH commandMDEVHL M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR
HOLD commandMDEVHP M-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY HOME POSITION
SENSOR signalMFCOVD MULTIFEEDER OPEN SENSOR signalMFFDCL MULTIFEEDER FEED CLUTCH commandMFLFMA MULTIFEEDER LIFTER MOTOR command AMFLFMB MULTIFEEDER LIFTER MOTOR command BMFLHD MULTIFEEDER LIFTER-HIGH SENSOR signalMFLLD MULTIFEEDER LIFTER-LOW SENSOR signalMFPAD MULTIFEEDER PAPER SENSOR signalMFPUCL MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH commandMFPUD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP SENSOR signalMFPUSL MULTIFEED PICK-UP SOLENOID commandMFPWVR MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH VR signalMNMON MAIN MOTOR ON commandMNMRDY MAIN MOTOR READY signalMTEP M-TONER EMPTY signalMTNRSUP* M-TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH commandOHPDTC OHP SENSOR signalOTDELD* EXTERNAL DELIVERY PAPER SENSOR signalOZFMERR OZONE SUCTION FAN ERROR signalOZFMON OZONE SUCTION FAN ON commandPCDTC PRE-CLEANING PAPER SENSOR signalPCFDCL POSTCARD FEEDER CLUTCH commandPCFMERR PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY FAN ERROR signalPCFMON PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY FAN ON commandPCMFMERR POWER CORD MOUNT FAN ERR signalPELA1ON PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP ON commandPH/TX/H200 ORIGINAL TYPE SELECT commandPOSTJD POST-TRANSFER PAPER SENSOR signalPRDMA POLISHING ROLLER MOTOR command APRDMB POLISHING ROLLER MOTOR command BPREJD PRE-TRANSFER PAPER SENSOR signalPRERGD PRE-REGISTRATION SENSOR signalPRIMFW PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANING MOTOR NORMAL
DRIVE commandPRIMRV PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANING MOTOR REVERSE
DRIVE commandPRM1A PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 command
A-7
APPENDIX
PRM1A* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 commandPRM1B PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 commandPRM1B* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 commandPRM1HL PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 HOLD commandPRM2A PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 2 commandPRM2A* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 2 commandPRM2B PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 2 commandPRM2B* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 2 commandPRM2HL PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR 2 HOLD commandPUFMERR POWER UNIT COOLING FAN ERROR signalPUFMON POWER UNIT COOLING FAN ON commandPUP1SL PICK-UP ROLLER 1 SOLENOID commandPUP2SL/PUPD1SL PICK-UP ROLLER 2/1 SOLENOID commandPUP3SL/PUPD2SL PICK-UP ROLLER 3/2 SOLENOID commandPUVP1AD PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-1 SENSOR signalPUVP2AD PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-2 SENSOR signalPUVP3AD PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-3 SENSOR signalPVE PAGE VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS commandRCOVD RIGHT COVER OPEN SENSOR signalREFMERR REAR INTAKE FAN ERROR signalREFMON REAR INTAKE FAN ON commandREGCL* REGISTRATION CLUTCH commandREGDTC REGISTRATION SENSOR signalREPUCL* DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP CLUTCH commandRGRLSL REGISTRATION ROLLER RELEASING SOLENOID commandRPUVPD DUPLEXING UNIT PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH SENSOR signalSCDSL SEPARATION CLAW SOLENOID commandSCFMERR LASER SCANNER MOTOR COOLING FAN ERROR signalSCFMON LASER SCANNER MOTOR COOLING FAN ON commandSCHP SCANNER HOME POSITION signalSHUTOFF* SHUT OFF signalSJAMD SEPARATION SENSOR signalSL1FMERR SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 1 ERROR signalSL1FMON SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 1 ON commandSL2FMERR SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 2 ERROR signalSL2FMON SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 2 ON commandSL3FMERR SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 3 ERROR signalSL3FMON SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN 3 ON commandSPACC SEPARATION CORONA AC ON/OFF CONTROL signalSPACI SEPARATION CORONA AC VOLTAGE LEVEL CONTROL signalSPDCC SEPARATION CORONA DC ON/OFF CONTROL signalSPDCI SEPARATION CORONA DC CURRENT LEVEL CONTROL signalSSPUPSL SEPARATION PUSH-UP SOLENOID commandSTCLOSE* STOP PLATE SOLENOID CLOSE commandSTOPEN* STOP PLATE SOLENOID OPEN commandTEMP ENVIRONMENT SENSOR TEMPERATURE signalTNFMERR TONER SUCTION FAN ERROR signalTNFMON TONER SUCTION FAN ON commandTRCMLK TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER BRUSH MOTOR LOCK signalTRCMON TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER BRUSH MOTOR ON commandTRDCMA TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR commandTRDCMA* TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR commandTRDCMB TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR command
APPENDIX
A-8
TRDCMB* TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR commandTRDCMHL TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER MOTOR HOLD commandTRDCPHP TRANSFER DRUM CLEANER HOME POSITION SENSOR signalTRDMA TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR commandTRDMA* TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR commandTRDMB TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR commandTRDMB* TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR commandTRDMHL TRANSFER DRUM MOTOR HOLD commandTRDPHP TRANSFER DRUM HOME POSITION SENSOR signalUFRCWD UPPER FIXING ROLLER CLEANING WEB SENSOR signalUHON UPPER FIXING HEATER ON commandUTHM1 UPPER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE 1 signalUTHM2 UPPER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE 2 signalUWEBSL UPPER CLEANING WEB SOLENOID commandVCLK VIDEO CLOCK PULSE commandVD0-VD7 VIDEO0-7 commandWTNRBD WASTE TONER FEEDING SCREW LOCK DETECTING SWITCH
signalWTONER WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR signalY-REF Y-REFERENCE signalY-SGNL Y-TONER DENSITY signalYDEVA Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandYDEVA* Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandYDEVB Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandYDEVB* Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR commandYDEVCL Y-DEVELOPING CYLINDER CLUTCH commandYDEVHL Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ENGAGING MOTOR HOLD
commandYDEVHP Y-DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY HOME POSITION SENSOR signalYTEP Y-TONER EMPTY signalYTNRSUP* Y-TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH command
AINTR ADDITIONAL INITIAL ROTATIONCNTR CONTROL ROTATIONCOPY COPYDSRDY SCANNER READYINTR INITIAL ROTATIONLSTR LAST ROTATIONSTBY STANDBYWMPU WARM UP
2. Abbreviations
A-9
C. General Circuit DiagramGeneral Circuit Diagram (1/3)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1
1
J227
1
1
Deck heater
Power cord
Leakagebreaker
Noisefilter
Leakagebreaker
NoisefilterPower cord
Power cord
Deck heater
Capacitor PCB
AC powercut relay
Environment switch
Cassette heater switch
AC fuse PCB
Lamp regulatorOpticalthermal switch 1
Opticalthermal switch 2
Scanning lamp
CCX main PCB
ControlCard V
ECO PCB
Lamp regulator
Original scanner motor driver PCB
Original scanner motor
Original scannerHP sensor
Original exposuresystem cooling fan 1
RDF socket
Projector socket
Memory PCB
DC driver PCB Bi-Centronics I/F PCB
Power switch
Control panel PCB
Inverter PCB
Keypad PCB Contrast VR PCB
Pilot lamp
LCD/touch panel
CPU PCB
Flash memory download
BD PCB
Editor socket
Original exposuresystemcooling fan 2
Original exposuresystem cooling fan 3
Electricalunit cooling fan
Ozonesuction fan
Exhaust fan
IP cooling fan
Laser scannermotor cooling fan
Primary chargingassembly fan
Back suction fanPowersupply cordmount fan
Drum motordrive PCB
HVT-DCPCB
HVT-ACPCB
Developingbias PCB
Transferlocking driver PCB
Hoppermotor PCB
Duplexingmotor driverPCB
Duplexing driverPCB
CCD/CCD driver PCB
Image processor mother PCB
For external device
Analog processor PCB
Laser controller PCB
Image processor main PCB
Image processorPRJ PCB (accessory)
Image processorED/IF PCB (accessory)
ECO relay PCB
Image processorECO PCB
Externaldevice socket
Laser driver PCB 1
Laser driver PCB 2
Laser heater PCB
InverterPCB
PickupdriverPCB
Laserscannermotor PCB
Image processormother PCB
For externaldevice
Laser controllerPCB
Analogprocessor PCB
Transfer lockingdriver PCB
TransformerPCB
Main motordriver PCB
Fixing motordriver PCB
DC driver PCB CPU PCB Original scannermotor driver PCB
AC powercut relay
DC fuse PCB
Transferlockingdriver PCB
Registrationpathdriver PCB
TransferdriverPCB
Left front door switch
Transfer unit lever switch
Delivery door switchDC power supply PCB
DC powercut relayRL3
Power supply assembly
FlickercontrollerPCB
Drum heater
controller PCB
Drum heater
Cassette heater 1
Cassette heater 2
Oil pump driver PCBOil pump
Fixing upper thermal switch
Fixing lower thermal switch
Fixing upper heater
Fixing lower heater
ST
B
CN
T *
SLI
FM
ER
R
SLI
FM
ON
EX
FM
ER
R
EX
FM
ON
IPF
ME
RR
IPF
ME
ON
SC
FM
ER
R
SC
FM
EO
N
RE
FM
ER
R
RE
FM
EO
N
PC
FM
ER
R
PC
FM
ON
PC
MF
ME
RR
RE
FM
ON
SL2
FM
ON
SL2
FM
ER
R
SL3
FM
ON
SL3
FM
ER
R
PU
FM
ON
PU
FM
ER
R
OZ
FM
ON
OZ
FM
ER
R
Choke coil PCB1 2 3
1
2
3
4H
N
H
N
MT2
OL1
J1F
FT4 ET32
ET31
J25LF1
ELB LF
FT1
FT2MT1
H
N
FT1
FT2MT1
H
N
FT1
FT2MT1
230V
ELCB
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4H
N
H
N
J1F J1M
FT3
FT4
MT2
OL1
ELCB LF1
H
N
FT1
FT2
100V
H
N
MT1
FT1
FT2
120V
1
2
3
H
H
N
N
N N
H
H
N N
H
N
J14
FU101
FT67 FT66ET33
SW8
ET20
ET4
FT48FT49
FT50FT51
ET4
FT56 FT52
FT55
FT54
FT57 FT53
SW6
230V only
100V120V
SSR2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H N H N H N H N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H N H N H N H N
J2M
J2F
1
2
H N H N H N H N H N
N
N N
N
N
H
N
J23
L1
H
N
ET1
ET2
ET9
ET8
ET3
FT21 FT20
FT22FT23
FT5
FT6 FT10
FT9
2 4
6 8
FT11
FT12
FT7
FT8
RL1
230V only
SSR1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3F
J3M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
H
N
H
N
N
N
H
H
SW1
FT24
FT26
FT25
FT27
J8M J8F1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
N
H
J11F J11MJ10J9 TP1 TP6FT43 FT44 FT45 FT46
FT41 FT40LA2
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
4
1
3
6
5
4
3
2
1
J4F J4M
J18F J18M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
RX
D
TX
D
CN
TP
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
CN
EC
T
GN
D
D-O
UT
*
D-I
N *
GN
D
SK
*
CS
*
GN
D
+5V
J2006A J2006B
J2004A J2004BJ201 J2001
J812B
J812HJ812A
J814
J813
J815B
J815HJ815A
J816B
J816HJ816A
J817ACCX
J820
J808
J2004H
J2006H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LAN
P-O
N
LAM
P-C
NT
R
GN
D
CU
R-E
RR
TM
R-R
ST
GN
D
LMP
-SN
S
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
J450
J821B
J821H
J821A
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OM
-IT
OP
-A
OM
-IT
OP
-B
GN
D
GA
TE
-MP
ULS
OM
-IN
T
GN
D
OM
-RE
SE
T
GN
D
(NC
)(N
C)
RX
D1
TX
D1
GN
D
RX
D2
TX
D2
GN
D
RX
D3
TX
D3
GN
D
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J603
J602A
J602H
J602B
J604
J2003A J2003B
J30
J30
J2003H
J2007H
J2007A J2007B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17
16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17
16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
XS
CL
GN
D
XD
0
GN
D
XD
1
GN
D
XD
2
GN
D
XD
3
GN
D
TX
D *
GN
D
RX
D *
GN
D
DO
FF
GN
D
WF
GN
D
YD
GN
D
LP GN
D
RE
SE
T
GN
D
BA
CK
_LIG
HT
_ON
*
GN
D
J903 J905 J907 J908
J901A J901B
J901H
J902
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
L-D
GT
2
L-D
GT
1
L-D
GT
0
K-D
GT
7
K-D
GT
6
K-D
GT
5
K-D
GT
4
K-D
GT
3
K-D
GT
2
K-D
GT
1
K-D
GT
0
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
L-R
TN
2
L-R
TN
1
L-R
TN
0
GN
D
K-R
TN
3
K-R
TN
2
K-R
TN
1
K-R
TN
0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 1
K-R
TN
7
K-D
GT
2
L-R
TN
3
L-D
GT
2
GN
D
VLC
D
VR
+24
V
GN
D
ELO
N
J921 J922 J963
J962
J941
J951
J923
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
TT
P-D
TT
P-R
TT
P-U
TT
P-L
DO
FF
DF
YD
LP XS
CC
VD
D
VS
S
VE
E
D0
D1
D2
D3
VE
E
VLC
D
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
1 2 3
GN
D
SC
AN
HP
+5V
PM15
PS1
M
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 6 7 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
GN
D
TX
D
GN
D
RX
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
PR
J_T
XD
*
GN
D
PR
J_R
XD
*
GN
D
+5V
SS
R_O
N *
DZ
_TX
D *
GN
D
DZ
_RX
D *
GN
D
DZ
_RE
Q *
GN
D
DZ
_AC
K *
GN
D
DZ
_CN
T *
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
J807B
FM1
J800A
J800B
J800H
MT110
J804
J305
SK4
FG
MT1 1
J802HJ802A
J802B J803A
J803B
FG
MT112
FG
J2002A J2002B
J2002H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2005H
J2005A J2005B
J2010A J2010B
J2010H
J2
J2008
J1006
J1005H
J1005A J1005B
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4
4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J745H
FM2
FM7
J744HJ745
J744
FM4
J735HJ735
GN
D
1 2 3
1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J733A
J733HJ733B
FM16
J811HJ81
FM3
1 2 3
FM17
J822HJ822
3 2 1
J723HJ723
1 2 31 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
FM14
J818HJ818
FM15
J819HJ819
FM8
J534HJ534
FM5
J720F
J2051A J2051B
J2051H
J2009 J2012
J201
J202 J204 J203
J2053J2052
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 111 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
F1
*
FR
FC
P *
FS
H *
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+9V
+9V
GN
D
BE
_IN
GN
D
BO
_IN
GN
D
GE
_IN
GN
D
GO
_IN
GN
D
RE
_IN
GN
D
RO
_IN
J2101
J205
J233B
J233A
J2102 J2103
J2201 J2002
MT113 MT114
J216B
J241
J242
J216A J217 J218
J215
J214
J211B J212B J213B
J211A J212A J213A J222A J221A
J222B J221B
J224
J223
J225
J226
J251A
J251B
J231A
J231B
J232A
J232B
J1205
J1203H
J1203A J1203B
J1303 J1302
J1304
J1305
J1202
J1301
J4 J1307
J1207
J1306
J1204H
J1204A J1204B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
GN
D
V<
15>
GN
D
V<
14>
GN
D
V<
13>
GN
D
V<
12>
GN
D
V<
11>
GN
D
V<
10>
GN
D
V<
9>
GN
D
V<
8>
GN
D
V<
7>
GN
D
V<
6>
GN
D
V<
5>
GN
D
V<
4>
GN
D
V<
3>
GN
D
V<
2>
GN
D
V<
1>
GN
D
V<
0>
GN
D
LZ_V
CLK
*
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GN
D
PU
E *
GN
D
h200
/400
*
GN
D
400/
800
*
GN
D
J1206
J1201
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1210
GND
+5V
GND
-5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
GN
D
Vo<
7>
GN
D
Vo<
6>
GN
D
Vo<
5>
GN
D
Vo<
4>
GN
D
Vo<
3>
GN
D
Vo<
2>
GN
D
Vo<
1>
GN
D
Vo<
0>
GN
D
DA
TAou
t *
GN
D
SC
K
GN
D
SD
ATA
GN
D
HD
1
GN
D
400/
800
*
GN
D
CK
800
GN
D
CK
400
+5V
R
GN
D
AP
CH
OLD
GN
D
LD_O
FF
GN
D
LD_O
N
GN
D
24V
HE
AT-
ON
TH
M
TH
M-R
TN
86 88 71 74 72 75 31 27 73 76
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+38
V
GN
D
+24
V
J928F
J928M
J372
J410
J926F
J926M
J420
J927M
J927F
J400
53 57 90 94 92 96
1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2
1 2
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+24
V
J300
J942F
J942M
79 83 54 56 80 84 45 50 66 55 32 33
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+24
V
J360
J364 J390
J541F
J961
B
(R-3)
43 48 89 93 59 62 36 37 39 40 24 23 60 63
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
+3.
3V
GN
D
+24
V
31 33 101
102
103 61 64 97 98 99 100 32 34 44 49 91 95
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
GN
D
+5V
8.8V
GN
D
-8V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+15
V
GN
D
8.8V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
J1200 J2100 J330 J340 J376 J200
29 28 11 10 108
109 65 67
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
+38
V
GN
D
+40
V
GN
D
GN
D
+38
V
GN
D
+24
V
J943 J370 J374
77 78 81 82 52 56 15 7 5 55 67 19 16 35 38 104
105 22 21 10 11
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
-8V
GN
D
+8.
8V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
+15
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+8.
8V
GN
D
+12
V
GN
D
+40
V
J1009 J2010 J380
51 55 18 25 10 11 12 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+15
V
+8V
R
GN
D
-8V
GN
Df
24V
f
J1010
32 33 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
J910 J906 J907 J908 J909 J931 J932
J930J905
FU
905
FU
904
FU
921
FU
922
FU
923
FU
924
FU
925
FU
903
FU
901
FU
906
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
+38
V
GN
D
GN
D
+38
V
+38
V
J933 J934 J935 J936
J939
GND
+24V
J937J938 FU941
FU940
FU
931
FU
934
FU
935
FU
932
FU
933
FU
936
FU
937
FU
938
FU
939
1
2
1
2GND
+24V
J920F J920MFT221
FT222
GND
+24V
RL1
A (R-4)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
GND
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+24V
ET220
ET222
J917M J917F
J316
J310
J3201
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
2
3
1
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
GND
+5V
+24V
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+24V
GND
+5V
J922F J922M
J923F J923M
42
47
GND
+5V
+24V
ET21
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
J915M
J915F
SW3FT209 FT21
CLC1150CLC1120
1130
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
J914Ma
J914F
FT205
FT206
FT207
FT208
SW5
+24V
+24V
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
J913M
J913F
SW4
FT201
FT202
FT203
FT204
20
17
9
6
5
15
14
8
4
30
26
69
41
46
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
12
13
14
15
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
108
109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
+15V
GND
8.8V
8.8V
GND
-8V
GND
8.8V
GND
+38V
GND
+5V
J940F J940M
1 2 3
1 2 3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
+24
V
GND
+24V
+15
V +38
V
+38
V
GN
D
+38
V
GN
D+
38V
GN
D
ET212
J951M
J951F
J1702
ET203 ET209
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J1703
J950M
J950F
1
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+38
V
+15
V
+38
V
+15
V
+24
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24
VF
GN
DF
+8.
8V
GN
D
+8V
R
GN
D
-8V
GN
D
+15
V
GN
D
+12
V
GN
D
+3.
3V
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
J929
J919F
J919M
FT
256
FT
257
FT
258
FT
259
FT
260
FT
251
FT
252
FT
253
FT
254
FT
255
ET204
ET205 ET206
ET207
RL3
ET208
J1705
J953M
J953F
J1704 J1706
J952M
J952F
J954M
J954
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
R1
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
H
N
H
N
H
H
N
N
H
N
N
H
N
H
ET5
ET6
J13F J13M J701
H4
H5
FT58 FT59
FT60 FT61
J52
J53
J15F J15M
J16F J16M
J5M J5F J24F J24M
FT62
FT63
FT64
FT65
J21
DRV4H3
J22
J7
J6
J51
230V only
230V only
100V
onl
y
120V
onl
y
230V
onl
y
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
H
N
H
N
MT3 MT4
MT5 MT6
TP2
TP3
FT31 FT32
FT37 FT38
H1
H2
FT33 FT29
FT39 FT35
J19J500F J500M
PSP1
1
FT3
11
11
11
11
11
CB1
J26
A-10
General Circuit Diagram (2/3)
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Duplexing feeding assembly(CLC1150 only)
1-cassette pickup assembly(CLC1120/1130 only)
2-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1120/1130 only)1-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1150 only)* Multifeeder
3-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1130 only)2-cassette pickup assembly (CLC1150 only)*
Duplexing unit (CLC1150 only)
Feed assembly
Transfer drum assembly
*The names of the electrical parts are from the CLC1120/1130.
Re-pickup motor
Re-pickup verticalpath sensor
Re-pickup clutch
Cassette 1pickup clutch
Pickup roller 1solenoid
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Cassette 1paper sensor Cassette 1
lifter sensorCassette 1 open/closed sensor
Pickup verticalpath switchsensor
Cassette 2pickup clutch
Pickup roller2 solenoid
Cassette 2paper sensor Cassette 2
lifter sensor
Cassette 2open/closedsensor
Pickupvertical path 2sensor
Pickup driver PCB
Cassette 3pickup clutch
Pickup roller 3solenoid
Cassette 3paper sensor Cassette 3
lifter sensor
Cassette 3open/closedsensor
Pickup verticalpath 3 sensor
Cassette 3 pickupmotor
Multifeederfeed clutch
Multifeederpickup clutch
Multifeederpickup solenoid
Multifeederlifter motor
Multifeederlifter H sensor
Multifeedertray open/closed sensor
Multifeederpaper widthdetecting VRMultifeeder
paper sensorMultifeederlifter L sensor
Multifeederpickup sensor
Cassette 3 paperwidth detecting VR
Cassette 3 paperlength sensor
Cassette 3 paperlevel detecting VR
Cassette 3lifter motor
Cassette 2lifter motor
Cassette 2 paperlevel detection VR
Cassette 2 paperwidth detecting VR
Cassette 2 paperlength sensorCassette 1 paper
level detecting VR
Cassette 1lifter motor
Duplexing motor Delivery verticalpath 1 sensor
Delivery paperdeflecting platesolenoid Delivery vertical
path 2 sensor
Delivery verticalpath roller clutch
Duplexing driver PCB
Duplexing paperfeed roller solenoid
Stopper platesolenoid
Duplexing traypaper sensor
Duplexing pathpaper sensor
Duplexing reversingpaper sensor
Stackingguide platesolenoid Duplexing
feed clutch
Duplexinginlet papersensor
Paper joggingguide HP sensor
Duplexing motor
Registration sensor
Transfer drum cleanerbrush motor Separation
sensor
Separation clawsolenoid
Registration clutchAttractionroller solenoid
Registration rollerunlocking solenoid
Pre-registrationsensor
Transparency sensor
Polishing rollermotor
Pre-registrationmotor 1
Pre-registrationmotor 2
Registration path drive PCB
Transfer drum frameconnector 2
DC driver PCB
Post-transferpaper sensor
Pre-transferpaper sensor
Attraction/transferlocking cam HPsensor
C Sensor Side A sensor
Side B sensor
Separationpush-upsolenoid
Transfer driver PCB
Attraction/transferlocking cam motor
Transfer drumframeconnector 1
Transfer unitlever switch
Transfer locking driver PCB
Transfer drum cleanerlocking motor
Transfer drum lockingmotor
Transfer drumHP sensor
Transfer drumcleaner HP sensor
Cassette 2 pickup motor
DU
PU
MA
DU
PU
MA
*
DU
PU
MB
DU
PU
MB
*
RE
PU
CL
*
RP
UV
PD
*
C1P
UM
A
C1P
UM
A *
C1P
UM
B
C1P
UM
B *
PU
P1S
L*
C1P
AD
*
C1L
FD
*
C1P
UC
L *
FD
C1D
*
PU
VP
1D *
C2P
UM
A
C2P
UM
A *
C2P
UM
B
C2P
UM
B *
PU
P2S
L *
C2P
AD
*
C2L
FD
*
C2P
UC
L *
FD
C2D
*
PU
VP
2D *
C3P
UM
A
C3P
UM
A *
C3P
UM
B
C3P
UM
B *
PU
P3S
L *
C3P
AD
*
C3L
FD
*
C3P
UC
L *
FD
C3D
*
PU
VP
3D * MF
FD
CL
*
MF
PU
CL
*
MF
LFM
B
MF
LFM
A
MF
PU
SL
*
MF
LHD
*
MF
PU
D *
MF
CO
VD
*
MF
LLD
*
MF
PA
D *
RE
F
MF
PW
VR
MF
PA
D
MF
PW
VR
MF
LHD
MF
LLD
MF
PU
D
MF
CO
VD
MF
PU
CL
MF
FD
CL
MF
LFM
A
MF
LFM
B
MF
PU
SL
C3P
UM
A
C3P
UM
A *
C3P
UM
B
C3P
UM
B *
C3P
UM
HL
C3P
UC
L
PU
P3S
L
C3P
AD
C3L
FD
PU
VP
3D
FD
C3D
C3P
WV
R
C3S
Z0
C3S
Z1
C3L
FM
ON
C3P
LVR
C2P
UM
A
C2P
UM
A *
C2P
UM
B
C2P
UM
B *
C2P
UM
HL
C2P
UC
L
PU
P2S
L
C2P
AD
C2L
FD
PU
VP
2D
FD
C2D
PU
P1S
L
C1P
AD
C1L
FD
FD
C1D
C1P
UM
A
C1P
UM
A *
C1P
UM
B
C1P
UM
B *
C1P
UM
HL
C1P
UC
L
PU
VP
1D
C2P
WV
R
C2S
Z1
C2S
Z0
C2L
FM
ON
C2P
LVR
DU
PU
MA
DU
PU
MA
*
DU
PU
MB
DU
PU
MB
*
DU
PU
MH
L
RE
PU
CL
RP
UV
PD
CIP
LVR
C1L
FM
ON
DU
PM
LK
DU
PM
ON
DLV
P1D
DE
LFLS
L *
DLV
P2D
DV
ER
PC
L *
DU
PP
FS
L *
ST
OP
EN
*
ST
CLO
SE
*
DU
PS
AP
D
DR
EP
D
DU
PP
PD
DE
CK
-OP
EN
EN
DP
LSL
DU
PP
PC
L *
DIN
PD
DJG
HP
DJO
GM
B *
DJO
GM
B
DJO
GM
A *
DJO
GM
A
CO
NE
CT
SJA
MD
RG
RLS
L
PR
ER
GD
RE
GD
TC
OH
PD
TC
LED
ON
*
SC
DS
L
TR
CM
LK
TR
CM
ON
PR
DM
A
PR
DM
B
PR
DE
RR
GG
VID
SL
RE
GC
L *
PR
M1H
L
PR
M1B
*
PR
M1B
PR
M1A
*
PR
M1A
PR
M2H
L
PR
M2B
*
PR
M2B
PR
M2A
*
PR
M2A
TF
-CN
CT
TD
-CN
CT
BLR
MH
L
BLR
MB
*
BLR
MB
BLR
MA
*
BLR
MA
BLR
MH
P
PO
ST
JD
PR
EJD
CIT
OP
BIT
OP
AIT
OP
SS
PU
PS
L
TR
DC
PH
P
TC
M-D
RV
TR
DC
PM
HL
TR
DC
PM
B *
TR
DC
PM
B
TR
DC
PM
A *
TR
DC
PM
A
TR
DP
HP
TD
M-D
RV
TR
DM
HL
TR
DM
B *
TR
DM
B
TR
DM
A *
TR
DM
A
TR
DC
PM
B *
TR
DC
PM
B
TR
DC
PM
A *
TR
DC
PM
A
TR
DM
B *
TR
DM
B
TR
DM
A *
TR
DM
A
TR
DC
PH
P
TR
DP
HP
BLR
MA
BLR
MA
*
BLR
MB
BLR
MB
*
TF
-CN
CT
TD
-CN
CT
BLR
MH
L
BLR
MB
*
BLR
MB
BLR
MA
*
BLR
MA
BLR
MH
P
PO
ST
JD
PR
EJD
CIT
OP
BIT
OP
AIT
OP
SS
PU
PS
L
SS
PU
PS
L
BIT
OP
PO
ST
JD
PR
EJD
BLR
MH
P
CIT
OP
AIT
OP
PR
M1B
*
PR
M1B
PR
M1A
*
PR
M1A
PR
M2B
*
PR
M2B
PR
M2A
*
PR
M2A
CO
NE
CT
SJA
MD
RG
RLS
L
PR
ER
GD
RE
GD
TC
OH
PD
TC
LED
ON
*
SC
DS
L
TR
CM
LK
TR
CM
ON
PR
DM
A
PR
DM
B
PR
DE
RR
GG
VID
SL
RE
GC
L *
PR
M1H
L
PR
M1B
*
PR
M1B
PR
M1A
*
PR
M1A
PR
M2H
L
PR
M2B
*
PR
M2B
PR
M2A
*
PR
M2A
RG
RLS
L *
RE
GC
L *
GG
UID
SL
*
PR
ER
GD
*
OH
PD
TC
LED
ON
EN
DP
LSL
*
DU
PP
PC
L * D
INP
D
DJG
HP
DJO
GM
A
DJO
GM
A *
DJO
GM
B
DJO
GM
B *
DJO
GM
B *
DJO
GM
B
DJO
GM
A *
DJO
GM
A
DJG
HP
DIN
PD
DU
PP
PC
L *
EN
DP
LSL
*
DR
EP
D
DE
CK
-OP
EN
DU
PP
PD
DU
PS
AP
D
ST
CLO
SE
*
ST
OP
EN
*
DU
PP
FS
L *
DU
PP
FS
L *
ST
CLO
SE
*
ST
OP
EN
*
DU
PS
AP
D
DU
PP
PD
DE
CK
-OP
EN
DR
EP
D
RE
GD
TC
*
LED
ON
TR
CM
ON
*
SJA
MD
*
SC
DS
L *
M
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
DCL
PM13
J661M
J350
CL15
J665HJ665
J663AJ663H
J663B
J349
PS28
J664AJ664HJ664B
J666
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2
1 2
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24
V
+24
V
M
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
SL
CL
J346J350
PM10
J661M
SL7
J647HJ647
PS20
J648
PS19
J649
CL1
J650HJ650
J643AJ643H
J643B
J644AJ644H
J644B
PS46 PS21
J651
M
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
SL
CL
J347
SL8
J626HJ626
PS24
J627
PS22
J628
CL12
J629HJ629
J621AJ621H
J621B
J622AJ622H
J622B
PS47 PS26
J630 J631
PM1
J351
M
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
1 2 3
1 2 3
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
CL
SL
PM12
SL9
J653HJ653
PS25
J654
PS23
J655
CL13
J656HJ656
J645AJ645H
J646AJ646H
PS48 PS27
J657 J658
J348J352
J645B J646B
M
1 2 3 1 2
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
CL CL
J632HJ632B
CL10
J623AJ623H
J623B
J633HJ633B
CL16
J634HJ634
M15
SLJ635HJ635
SL14
PS17
J636
PS
J637
PS62
J638
PS18
J639
PS15
J641 J640
VR7
J624AJ624H
J624B
J625AJ625H
J625B
J341B
J345H
J345B J345A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MA
NU
LIF
TM
TR
ER
R
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J1017B
M
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2 3
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
J1018H
J1018A J1018B
J614AJ614H
J614B
J620
VR5
J612AJ612H
J612B
J619
PSU3
M13
J613HJ613
J660AJ660H
J660B
J611
VR6
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J344
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J341H
J341A
J1017A
J1017H12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2
1 2 3
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
MJ610A
J610HJ610B
J618
VR3
J608AJ608H
J608B
J617
PSU2
M12
J609HJ609
J642AJ642H
J642B
J607
VR4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2
+5V
GN
D
MS
1-S
W0
MS
1-S
W1
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
WID
TH
1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
M
J1020A J1020B
J1020H
VR2
J603
J659AJ659HJ659B
M11
J605HJ659A
J343 J342
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J342
J1019A
J1019H J1019H
J1019A J1019B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
+24
V
SLCL
J1029
J701AJ701HJ701B
J365J707
PS32
SL10
J706HJ706
J705
PS33
CL19
J708HJ708
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J393B J393A
J393H
J391AJ391B
J391H
J392AJ392B
J392H
J1022AJ1022B
J1022H
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 116 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
SL
SL
J689HJ689
J690HJ690 J691SL13
SL12 PS36
PS34 PS35
J692H
J692B
J692A
J699 J698
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
5 4 3 2 1
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
+24
V
SL
CL
J686M J686F
J693HJ693
SL15
J694HJ694
CL14 J695
PS37
J696
PS40
J697HJ697
PM14
J688BJ688H
J688A
M
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
3 2 1 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
TR
CM
LK
GN
D
GN
D
+5V +24
V
SLJ549H
J549A
J549B
J560 J559
J317
J558
PS7
J548HJ548B
J548A
SL4
J557HJ557B
PS70S PS70L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
SLCL
SL
J556H
J556
J555H
J555
J551H
J551
SL5 SL6
CL9
J751HJ751B
J751A
J544
PS30
J553 J552
PS69S PS69L
M
MM
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
PR
DM
A
PR
DM
B
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
J311AJ311B
J311H
J312BJ312A
J312H
J315
J545MJ545F
J546M
M9
J314 J313
PM9 PM8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+8V
FT104
FT120
MT103
MT108
J544B-B
J544B-A
J544A-B
J544A-A
J544H-B
J544H-A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+8V
J1013AJ1013B
J1013H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+24
V
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
SL S P S P
J582HJ582B
SL3
J581
PS3
J579
PS6 PS5
J578
PS8
J577
PS4
J576
PS2
J575
J321A J321B
J322A J322B
J321H
J322H
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 5 4 3 2 1
+5v
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+5v
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
J1014BJ1014A
J1014H
FT105
FT121
MT104
MT109
J571A-B
J571A-A
J571B-B
J571B-A
J571H-B
J571H-A
J574B
J574HJ574A
SW3
PM7
M
M
3 2 1 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
GN
D
+5V GN
D
+5V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
J304
J323
J515BJ515H
J515A
J517
PS59 PS57
J514BJ514H
J514A
J516
J303 J302
J513HJ513
PM5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J301B J301A
J301H
J1002H
J1002B J1002A
1
J652
1
9
1
1
M
3 2 1
1 2 3
J561H
J561B
J561A
A-11
General Circuit Diagram (3/3)
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Developing assembly Hopper assembly
Power switchassembly High-voltage transformerFixing assembly
Motor assembly
M tonerconcentrationsensor
Y tonerconcentrationsensor
C tonerconcentrationsensor
Black tonerconcentrationsensor
Pre-cleaning paper sensor
Pickup coversensor
Developing locking driver PCB
Bk developingcylinder clutch
M developingcylinder clutch
C developingcylinder clutch
Y developingcylinder clutch
Y developinglocking motor
M developinglocking motor
C developinglocking motor
C developingassembly HPsensor
Bk developingassembly HPsensor
M developingassembly HPsensor
Y developingassembly HPsensor
DC driver PCB
Delivery assembly
Ozonesuction fan
Deliverycooling fan
External deliverysensor
Pre-exposurelamp
PotentialmeasurementPCB
Waste tonerfeedscrew clogdetecting switch
HVT-DC PCB HVT-AC PCB
Post-cleaning
Primarycharging
Flickercontroller PCB
Oil pumpdriver PCB
Fixing lowerthermistor 3
Fixing lowerthermistor 4
Fixing upperthermistor 2
Fixing oillevel sensor
Internaldelivery sensor
Fixing uppercleaning beltlength sensor
Fixing lowercleaning beltlength sensor
Fixing uppercleaning beltsolenoid
Fixing lowercleaning beltsolenoid
Fixing upperthermistor 1
Laser scanner motor Fixing motor Main motor Drum motor
Post-feed clutch
Cleaning bladereciprocating motor
Power supplycooling fan 2
Power supplycooling fan 1
Delivery coversensor
Waste toner casefull sensor
Right front coversensor
Left frontcover sensorEnvironment
sensor
Sorter/buffer path socket Paper deck socket
Primary chargingwire cleaning motor
Oil pump driverPCB
Power switchControl key
Bk developinglocking motor
Hoppe motor M toner levelsensor
C toner levelsensor
Y toner levelsensor
Bk toner levelsensor
M tonersupplyclutch
C tonersupplyclutch
Y tonersupplyclutch
Bk tonersupplyclutch
Developing bias PCB
Attr
actio
n
Tra
nsfe
r
Inte
rnal
stat
ic e
limin
ator
Externalstaticeliminator
Separation
M-S
GN
I
M-R
EF
MLA
ON
*
Y-S
GN
I
Y-R
EF
YLA
ON
*
C-S
GN
I
C-R
EF
CLA
ON
*
PC
TH
M
PC
DT
C
PC
LED
ON
FD
CO
VD
BK
-SG
NI
BK
-RE
F
BK
LAO
N *
KD
EV
CL
*
MD
EV
CL
*
CD
EV
CL
*
YD
EV
CL
*
YD
EV
A
YD
EV
A *
YD
EV
B *
MD
EV
A
MD
EV
A *
MD
EV
B
MD
EV
B *
YD
EV
B
CD
EV
A
CD
EV
A *
CD
EV
B
CD
EV
B *
KD
EV
A
KD
EV
A *
KD
EV
B
KD
EV
B *
KD
EV
HP
MD
EV
HP
CD
EV
HP
YD
EV
HP
HO
PM
ON
HO
PM
LK
HO
PM
CW
MT
EP
CT
EP
YT
EP
BK
TE
P
MT
NR
SU
P *
CT
NR
SU
P *
YT
NR
SU
P *
KT
NR
SU
P *
CD
EV
A
CD
EV
A *
CD
EV
B
CD
EV
B *
CD
EV
HL
CD
EY
CL
CD
EV
HP
KD
EV
A
KD
EV
A *
KD
EV
B
KD
EV
B *
KD
EV
HL
KD
EV
CL
KD
EV
HP
YD
EV
A
YD
EV
A *
YD
EV
B
YD
EV
B *
YD
EV
HL
YD
EY
CL
YD
EV
HP
MD
EV
A
MD
EV
A *
MD
EV
B
MD
EV
B *
MD
EV
HL
MD
EY
CL
MD
EV
HP
TH
M3
LTH
M4
UT
HM
2
FX
OIL
D
UW
EB
SL
LWE
BS
L
UT
HM
1
L
IND
ELD
UF
RC
WD
LFR
CW
D
US
SR
D
UH
ON
LSS
RD
LHO
N
UH
ON
LHO
N
CO
PY
/RD
Y
US
SR
D
LSS
RD
PU
MP
ON
PU
MP
D
UH
ON
LHO
N
CO
PY
/RD
Y
US
SR
D
LSS
RD
PU
MP
ON
PU
MP
D
SH
UT
OF
F *
KE
KS
W *
KE
Y_R
ET
PR
IMF
W
PR
IMR
V
WT
NR
BD
WT
NR
BR
-RE
T
EP
OT
TN
FM
ER
R
TN
FM
ON
PE
LA1O
N *
DLF
ME
RR
DLF
MO
N
OT
DE
LD *
DS
SE
L0
DS
SE
L1
DS
SE
L2
DC
NC
T
DP
UM
HL
DP
UM
B *
DP
UM
B
DP
UM
A *
DP
UM
A
DLF
MO
N
DLF
MU
P
DLF
ME
RR
*
DO
LON
DP
UC
D
DO
PS
D
DP
RS
D
DLF
PD
DK
PP
E
DP
FD
DCN
T *
DO
OR
JAM
CA
MH
P
CL1
-ON
SL1
-ON
MT
R-E
NB
*
HP
-SE
L
BP
MO
N
BP
MC
LK
RC
0VD
LHU
M
HU
M
TE
MP
LC0V
D
DC
FM
ER
R
DR
HE
RR
DR
HO
FF
DLC
0VD
WT
ON
ER
CB
RC
MA
CB
RC
MB
PC
FD
CL
*
MN
MR
DY
MN
MO
N
DR
MC
LK
DR
MC
W
DR
MS
P1
DR
MS
P0
DR
MF
G
DR
MR
DY
DR
MO
N
LSM
RD
Y
LSM
ON
LSM
SE
L
LSM
CLK
FX
MS
P1
FX
MS
P0
FX
MLX
FX
MO
N
FX
MC
LK
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
+8V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
J1007A J1007B
J1007H
J518AJ518H
J518B
J525
J519AJ519H
J519B
J526
J520AJ520H
J520B
J527
J521AJ521H
J521B
J528
J522AJ522H
J522B
J529
PS44
J531
J524AJ524HJ524B
PS71
+8V
GN
D
-8V
+8V
GN
D
-8V
+8V
GN
D
-8V +8V
GN
D
-8V
CL CL CL CL
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
J335 J333 J334
J587AJ587HJ587B
J594HJ594
CL4
J595HJ555
CL1
J596HJ596
CL2
J597HJ597
CL3
J585AJ585HJ585B
J590HJ590
J591HJ591
PM3 PM1
J586AJ586HJ586B
J592HJ592
PM2
J593HJ593
PM4
M M M M
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
J336
J588AJ588HJ588B
J589AJ589HJ589B
J598
PS55
J599
PS49
J600
PS51
J601
PS53
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J1016A J1016B
J1016H
J332A J332B
J332H
J1015A J1015B
J1015H
J331A J331B
J331H
GN
D
+8V -8
V
+15
V
+5V
+24
V
+24
Vf
GN
Df
J1039
J1021A
J1021H
J671A_H
J671A_A
J671H
J671B_A
J671B_H
J671A_B
J671B_B
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 21 21 21 2
1 2 31 2 31 2 31 2 31 2 3 4
GN
D GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
CL CL CL CLJ361
M10
TS1
J678HJ678
TS2
J679HJ679
TS3
J680HJ680
MT115
MT116
MT117
MT118
MT1
MT120
TS4
J681HJ681
MT121
MT122
J672HJ672B
CL5
J673HJ673B
CL6
J674HJ674B
CL7
J675HJ675B
CL8
CN
CT
RE
T
J537HJ537
J538
J536A
J543AJ543H
J543B
CLC1120/1130
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3
+24
V
+24
V
+24
V
+5V
GN
D
J1008A J1008B
J1008H
J536A
J536HJ536B
J537HJ537
J532HJ532 J533H
J533
J538
FM1 PS31
FM6LA1
CLC1150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 18 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DB
BP
C1
DB
DC
I1
DB
DC
C1
DB
S2
(Y)
DB
S1
(M)
DB
SB
1
GN
D
TR
IG
+20
V
DB
BP
C2
DB
DC
I2
DB
DC
C2
DB
S4
(BK
)
DB
S3
(C)
J1001B J1001A
J1001H
J748AJ748H
J748B
J747AJ747H
J747B
J401 J402
J404 J405
J407M
J407F
J406M
J406F
Y C M Bk
BP5
BP6
BP3
BP4
BP1
BP2
BP7
BP8
MT135 MT133 MT131 MT137
MT136 MT134 MT132 MT138
FT133 FT132 FT131 FT134
6 7 8 9 10
1 2
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
2
1
2
1
2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2
GN
D
DC
SB
Y
HV
PR
HV
GIC
HV
GI
HV
CC
HV
CI
HV
AT
C
HV
AT
I
HV
TR
C
HV
TR
I
GN
D
+24
V
MT139 MT140
J41
J412J441
P G Pst Q T I O S
R5 R6 R12 R7 R8 R9 R10 R1
J440
SW7
J535AJ535H
J535B
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2
+24
V
GN
D
J1024B J1024A
J1024H
M6
J713M
SW1SW2
FT108 FT109
J711M
J711F
J932-7J714M
J714F
DRV3
J715
J430
SSR1
SSR1
100V120V/USA
CN
T4
CN
T3
CN
T2
CN
T1
+24
V
1 2 3 4 5
J1030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3+
24V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J430J716
J714M
DRV3
J715
SSR1
SSR1
230V120V/TWN
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TH
M3-
RE
T
TH
M4-
RE
T
TH
M2-
RE
T
+5V
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
P S
J510J509H
J509A
J509B
PS67PS10
J507HJ507
J508H
J508A
J511 J512
J508B
PS12 1
THM2
J506F
THM4
J505F
THM3
J504F
1 2 31 2 31 2 31 2 3
1 2 31 2 3
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 31 2 3
ET101
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SL SL
+24
V
+24
V
TH
M1-
RE
T
THM1
J503F
1 2 31 2 31 2 3
SL1 SL2
J502FJ501F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
+24
V
+24
V
TH
M1-
RE
T
TH
M3-
RE
T
TH
M4-
RE
T
TH
M2-
RE
T
GN
D
+5V
J1004A J1004B
J1004H
J500AM
J500AF
J500BM
J500BF
FT119
FT101
FT1
FT100MT107
MT101
MT106
MT100
J1026B J1026A
J1026H
M
M
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
J377 J375
M3
M5
J371
M4
M
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CL
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
J373
M2
CL18
J725
J725HJ722B
J722HJ722A
JPN ONLY
M
3 2 1
M7
J726F
J1028
5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 12 1
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
+5V
GN
D
GN
D
+5V
J1025
J460F
J460M
J1707
FM13 FM9
J719
SSR2
J1027B J1027A
J1027H
J739BJ739H
J739A
J740BJ740H
J740A
J741
PS43 J743 J742
J530
PS41
J523HJ523A
100/120V ONLY
SSR2
PS68L PS68S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
+24
V_F
GN
D_F
GN
D
+5V
J736
J737
PS42
J734BJ734H
J734A
UN10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RxD
GN
D
TxD
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
SL2
N.C
.
GN
D
GN
D
N.C
.
N.C
.
N.C
.
N.C
.
J1023B J1023A
J1023H
J712
J709BJ709H
J709A
J710BJ710H
J710A
MT105
J5004-5 +24V
J5004-4 GND A (F-2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 5 6 7 9 10 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 8
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
+5V
GN
D
+24
V
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
J1011B J1011A
J1011H
J540BJ540H
J540A
J539BJ539H
J539AJ541M
J542
B
(E-3)MT102
J1012A J1012B
J1012H
1
J1021B
19
GN
D ET100
1811 10
11 10
J523B
1
1
J4211
1
<==
J717
PS1
GN
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1311 12
13 12 11 10
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
AC
SB
Y
IO-S
EL1
IO-S
EL0
SP
DC
C
SP
DC
I
SP
AC
C
SP
AC
I
HV
IDC
C
HV
IDC
I
HV
IOC
AC
-ER
R
J749AJ749H
J749B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J1050
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
230V
100V/120V
A-13
D. Paper Deck General Circuit Diagram
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1234567891011121314
Deck driver PCB
Deck opensensor
Deck open solenoid
Deck liftermotor
Deck lifterlower limitdetecting switch
Deck paperlevel lowersensor
Deckopenswitch
Deckopenindication
Deck pickupclutch
Copier socket
Deck pickupsolenoid
Deck paperlevel uppersensor
Deck opendetectingswitch
Deck set sensor
Deck pickup motor
Deck pickupsensor
Deck lifterpositionsensor
Deck lifterupper limitsensor
Deck paperabsentsensor
GN
D 5VG
ND
24V
U
DLF
MO
ND
LFM
UP
DLF
ME
RR
*
DO
LON
DP
UC
DG
ND
DO
PS
DD
PR
SD
DLF
PD
GN
DD
KP
PE
DP
FD
D
DS
SE
L0D
SS
EL1
DS
SE
L2D
CN
CT
DP
UM
HL
GN
DD
PU
MB
*D
PU
MB
GN
DD
PU
MA
*D
PU
MA
J3
J1A J1B
J1H
MT1
J32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J5A J5B
J5H
GN
DD
KP
PE
*5V
GN
DD
LFU
L5V
GN
DD
LFP
D 5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24V
UD
PR
SD
*G
ND
DP
FD
D 5V 24V
DP
UC
D*
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J10D
J10L
J15D
J15L
J15H
8 9 10 11
DO
LON
*5V
GN
DD
OP
EN
*
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4J19L
J19DJ19H
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SL
J11 J13 J14
PS102 PS103 PS104
J16DJ16H
J16L
SL101
3 2 1 2 1
CL
J17 J18DJ18H
J18L
SL102
PS101
4 3 2 1
J20 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
123
1 2 3
PS108
PS107
SW102
J25D
J25LJ25H
J26
J24
J23
J22M
J22F
GN
DD
PLL
D5V G
ND
DP
LUD
5V DLF
LDG
ND
DLF
TD
WD
LFT
UP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J4
24V
UD
OP
SD
*
GN
DD
MN
TS
D5V
2 11 2
3 2 1
PS109
PS105J28D
SLSL102
J29
GN
DD
OP
ND
5V DO
PN
SW
GN
D
3 2 1
1 2 3
SW101
J30
J31
1 2 3
J6J7
J2
DP
UM
B
24V
U
DP
UM
B*
DP
UM
A
24V
U
DP
UM
A*
PM101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2 1
M101
J27F
J27M
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M
M
Acrobat document
A-15
APPENDIX
Table A-2
E. Specifications
1. Type
Item Specifications
Body Console (reader and printer constructed as one)
Copyboard Fixed
Light source Halogen lamp
Lens Arranged in an array
Image reader Photocell (BRG line CCD; fixed, mirror scanning)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (180-mm dia.)
Table A-1
2. System
Item Specifications
Copying Laser beam indirect photostatic transfer
Charging Corona
Exposure Slit, laser beam
Contrast adjustment Automatic
Development Dry toner projection
Toner supply Manual (345 g/bottle)
Pickup Cassette x 2 (CLC1120/1150), cassette x 3 (CLC1130),multifeeder tray, duplexing unit (CLC1150)
Attraction Pre-transfer static attraction
Transfer Blade transfer
Separation Separation claw, separation pushup roll (separationcharging assembly as auxiliary mechanism)
Cleaning Cleaning blade
Fixing Heat rollerUpper: 540 W (100/120 V), 700 W (230 V)Lower: 500 W (common for all models)
Note: The CLC1120 is available only as a non-Japanese model.
APPENDIX
A-16
Table A-3
3. Functions
Item Specifications
Resolution Reader: 400 x 400 dpiRecorder: 800-equivalent x 400 dpi
Gradation 256 gradationsOriginal type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)Maximum original size A3 (297 x 420 mm) / 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)Copy size AB: 6R5E (Japanese)
Inch/A: 5R4E (North or Central America)AB/Inch: 6R5E (Asia, Oceania, South America)
Zoom 25% to 400% (in 1% increments)Wait time 8 min 30 sec or less (at 20°C) ; 120V
8 min or less (at 20°C) ; 230VFirst copy time (w/o pre-scanning) Less than 18.1 sec (full color ; no pre-scanning)
Less than 9.6 sec (mono color ; no pre-scanning)Continuous copying 1 to 100 sheetsCopying speed See Table 1-206.Copy size Cassette: B5 (257 x 182 mm)/LTR to A3 (297 x 420
mm)/279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)Multifeeder: B5 (257 x 182 mm) to A3 (297 x 420 mm)/
279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) + extra lengthsize (12 x 18)
Copy paper type Cassette: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), transparency(A4/LTR)
Multifeeder: Plain paper (64 to 209 g/m2), transparency(A4/LTR)
Auto double-sided: Plain paper only (90 to 105 g/m2)Multifeeder double-sided: Plain paper only (90 to 209 g/m2)
Cassette No claw, front loading, 60 mm deep (about 550 sheets of 81.4 g/m2)Multifeeder 250 sheets (81.4 g/m2)Duplexing unit 50 sheets (105 g/m2)Copy tray 100 sheets 981.4 g/m2)Image margin Leading edge: 8.0 ± 1.5 mm (8.0 ± 2.0 mm)
Trailing edge: 2.5 ± 1.5 mm (4.5 ± 2.0 mm)Left/right: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm (2.0 ± 1.5 mm)Parentheses represent double-sided copying.
Auto clear Yes, 2-min standard (may be changed between 0 and 9 min)Auto power-off Yes , 1-hr standard (may be changed between 0 and 24hr)Power Save mode Yes , (Saving level may be either -10%, -25%, -50%, or
non-recovery)Accessories RDF-E2/RDF-E2 CLC1100 Series Power Supply Kit
Stapler Sorter-F1/CLC Buffer Pass Unit 1CLC Paper Deck-E1CLC Film Projector-D1Editor-F1CLC IP-ED Board-B1 (hereafter, IP-ED Board)CLC Interface Board-D1 (hereafter, IP-IF Board)Document Holder-E1Cassette Heater Kit-15, Cassette Heater Kit-16 (non-Japanese)Control Card-VCopy Data Controller-A1Remote Diagnostic Device II
A-17
APPENDIX
Table A-4
Table A-5a
4. Others
Item Specifications
Operating environment Temperature: 15° to 30°C / 59 to 86 °FHumidity: 5% to 80%Atmospheric pressure: 810 to 1013 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)
Power supply 100V / 50, 60Hz 120V / 60Hz, 230V / 50Hz
Serial No. CLC1120: NNE ***** NND ***** PNJ *****RNC ***** SND ***** UND *****
CLC1130: LNC ***** PNM ***** QND *****RNE ***** SNC ***** TNC *****UNC ***** PNR *****
CLC1150: LNB ***** NNC ***** PNB *****QNB ***** RNB ***** SNB *****TNB ***** UNB ***** PNH *****
Maximum power consumption 1.5 kW or lessCopying: 719 Wh or less (reference only)Standby: 338 Wh or less (reference only)
Noise Copying: 73 dB (sound power level)Standby: 59 dB (sound power level)
Ozone 0.02 ppm or less (average; 0.05 ppm max.)
Dimensions Width: 768 mm / 30.2 inDepth: 773 mm / 30.5 inHeight: 1000 mm / 39.4 in
Weight 291.5 kg / 642.5 lb (approx.; CLC1150)277.5 kg / 611.6 lb (approx.; CLC1130)272.5 kg / 600.6 lb (approx.; CLC1120)
Consumables Copy paper: Keep wrapped, and protect against moisture.Toner: Protect against direct sunlight, and keep
under 40°C, 85%.
5. Default Ratios
a. Japan Australia, others (6R5E)
Item Enlargement Reduction
Default ratio I 1 : 1.154 I 1 : 0.250II 1 : 1.224 II 1 : 0.500III 1 : 1.414 III 1 : 0.611IV 1 : 2.000 IV 1 : 0.707V 1 : 4.000 V 1 : 0.816
VI 1 : 0.865
APPENDIX
A-18
b. North America (5R4E)
Item Enlargement Reduction
Default ratio I 1 : 1.214 I 1 : 0.25II 1 : 1.294 II 1 : 0.50III 1 : 2.000 III 1 : 0.647IV 1 : 4.000 IV 1 : 0.733
V 1 : 0.785
Table A-5b
c. Europe (3R3E)
Item Enlargement Reduction
Default ratio I 1 : 1.414 I 1 : 0.25II 1 : 2.000 II 1 : 0.50III 1 : 4.000 III 1 : 0.707
Table A-5c
6. Copying Speed
Size Copy paper size copies/min (full color) copies/min (mono color)
A3 (297 x 420 mm) A3 5.5 21A4 (210 x 297 mm) A4 11 42AAR (297 x 210 mm) A4R 5.5 21B4 (257 x 364 mm) B4 5.5 21B5 (182 x 257 mm) B5 11 42
279.4 x 431.8 mm 11 x 17 5.5 21(11” x 17”)LTR LTR 11 42LTRR LTRR 5.5 21LGL LGL 5.5 21
Table A-6
Specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
A-19
APPENDIX
7. CLC Paper Deck-E1
Item Specifications
Pickup No claw (retard)
Storage Side tray
Copy paper type Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
Copy paper size A4, B5, LTR
Storage size 2500 sheets (105 g/m2)
Serial No. ZRU ****** ZRT ***** ZRS *****
Paper size switch By size guide plate in steps and in service mode(OPTION>ACC>DK-P)
Dimensions Width: 323.2 mm / 127 inDepth: 591 mm / 23.3 inHeight: 432 mm / 17.0 in
Width 30.6 kg / 67.4 lb
Power supply DC, from the copier
Operating environment Same as the copier
Specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
Table A-7
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (MAR. 1999) (18723/35338/71720)
REVISION 1 (JAN. 2000) (18723)
REVISION 2 (DEC. 2000) (18723)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi Ibaraki, 302-8501 Japan
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
This publication is printed on 100% recycled paper.
1200AB1.28-0